EB 5578 EN
Translation of original instructions

TROVIS 5578 Heating and District Heating Controller
With graphics display

Firmware version 2.63
Edition January 2023

Note on these mounting and operating instructions
These mounting and operating instructions assist you in mounting and operating the device
safely. The instructions are binding for handling SAMSON devices. The images shown inthese instructions are for illustration purposes only. The actual product may vary.
Î For the safe and proper use of these instructions, read them carefully and keep them forlater reference.
Î If you have any questions about these instructions, contact SAMSON‘s After-sales Service(aftersalesservice@samsongroup.com).

Documents relating to the device, such as the mounting and operating
instructions, are available on our website at www.samsongroup.com >Service & Support > Downloads > Documentation.

Definition of signal words! DANGER
Hazardous situations which, if not avoided,
will result in death or serious injury! WARNING
Hazardous situations which, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious injury! NOTICE
Property damage message or malfunction
Note
Additional information
Tip
Recommended action

EB 5578 EN

Contents

1
1.1
1.2

Safety instructions and measures.................................................................1-1
Notes on possible severe personal injury.......................................................1-3
Notes on possible property damage..............................................................1-3

2
2.1
2.2

Markings on the device...............................................................................2-1
Nameplate..................................................................................................2-1
Firmware versions........................................................................................2-1

3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5

Design and principle of operation................................................................3-1
Configuration using the TROVIS-VIEW software.............................................3-1
Connection to SAM DISTRICT ENERGY..........................................................3-2
Technical data.............................................................................................3-3
Dimensions..................................................................................................3-4
Values for resistance thermometers................................................................3-5

4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4

Shipment and on-site transport....................................................................4-1
Accepting the delivered goods......................................................................4-1
Removing the packaging from the controller...................................................4-1
Transporting the heating controller................................................................4-1
Storing the controller....................................................................................4-1

5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4

Installation..................................................................................................5-1
Installation conditions...................................................................................5-1
Preparation for installation............................................................................5-1
Mounting the controller.................................................................................5-1
Electrical connection.....................................................................................5-3

6
6.1
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4

Operation...................................................................................................6-1
Operating controls.......................................................................................6-1
Interfaces....................................................................................................6-2
M-bus interface ..........................................................................................6-2
Device bus interface RS-485.........................................................................6-2
Optional interfaces......................................................................................6-2
Accessories.................................................................................................6-3

7
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6

Start-up and configuration...........................................................................7-1
Altering the display contrast..........................................................................7-3
Changing the display language....................................................................7-3
Setting the system code number....................................................................7-4
Activating and deactivating functions............................................................7-5
Changing parameters..................................................................................7-7
Calibrating sensors......................................................................................7-8

EB 5578 EN

Contents

7.6.1
7.7

Special values............................................................................................7-11
Entering customized key number.................................................................7-12

8
8.1
8.2
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4
8.2.5
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.5.1
8.6

Setup..........................................................................................................8-1
Selecting the operating mode........................................................................8-1
Schedules....................................................................................................8-3
Setting the time and date..............................................................................8-3
Setting the times-of-use.................................................................................8-5
Setting the party timer (special time-of-use)....................................................8-7
Programming public holidays (special times-of-use)........................................8-8
Programming vacation periods (special times-of-use)......................................8-9Entering day and night set points................................................................8-12
Reset to default settings...............................................................................8-14
Reading information..................................................................................8-14
Adapting the Trend-Viewer.........................................................................8-19
Operating the controller in manual mode.....................................................8-21

9
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5

Malfunctions...............................................................................................9-1
Error list......................................................................................................9-2
Sensor failure..............................................................................................9-2
Temperature monitoring................................................................................9-3
Fault alarm output........................................................................................9-3
Error status register......................................................................................9-4

10Servicing..................................................................................................10-1

11

Decommissioning......................................................................................11-1

12

Removal...................................................................................................12-1

13
13.1

Repairs.....................................................................................................13-1
Returning devices to SAMSON...................................................................13-1

14

Disposal....................................................................................................14-1

15

Certificates................................................................................................15-1

16
16.1
16.2
16.2.116.2.1.1
16.2.1.2
16.2.1.3
16.2.1.4

Annex A (configuration instructions)...........................................................16-1
Systems.....................................................................................................16-1
Functions of the heating circuit................................................................16-177
Outdoor-temperature-compensated control..............................................16-177
Outdoor temperature received or sent as 0 to 10 V signal.........................16-178
Outdoor temperature received or sent over the device bus.........................16-179
Gradient characteristic...........................................................................16-180
Four-point characteristic.........................................................................16-182

EB 5578 EN

Contents

16.2.2
Fixed set point control............................................................................16-183
16.2.3
Underfloor heating/drying of jointless floors............................................16-184
16.2.4Night set-back.......................................................................................16-185
16.2.4.1 Outdoor temperature for continuous day mode........................................16-186
16.2.4.2 Variable night set-back...........................................................................16-186
16.2.5
Buffer tank systems.................................................................................16-187
16.2.6
Summer mode.......................................................................................16-191
16.2.7
Delayed outdoor temperature adaptation.................................................16-192
16.2.8
Remote operation...................................................................................16-192
16.2.9Optimization.........................................................................................16-193
16.2.10 Flash adaptation....................................................................................16-194
16.2.10.1 Flash adaptation without outdoor sensor (based on room temperature)......16-195
16.2.11 Adaptation............................................................................................16-196
16.2.12 Cooling control......................................................................................16-196
16.2.13 Differential temperature control...............................................................16-198
16.3
Functions of the DHW circuit...................................................................16-199
16.3.1
DHW heating in the storage tank system..................................................16-199
16.3.1.1 DHW circuit additionally controlled by a globe valve................................16-201
16.3.2
DHW heating in the storage tank charging system....................................16-202
16.3.2.1 Cold charging protection........................................................................16-205
16.3.3
DHW heating in instantaneous heating system.........................................16-205
16.3.4
Domestic hot water heating with solar system...........................................16-206
16.3.5Intermediate heating..............................................................................16-207
16.3.6
Parallel pump operation.........................................................................16-207
16.3.7
Circulation pump during storage tank charging.......................................16-208
16.3.8
Priority circuit........................................................................................16-208
16.3.8.1 Reverse control......................................................................................16-208
16.3.8.2 Set-back operation.................................................................................16-209
16.3.9Forced charging of DHW storage tank.....................................................16-209
16.3.10 Thermal disinfection of DHW storage tank...............................................16-210
16.4
System-wide functions............................................................................16-212
16.4.1
Automatic summer/standard time switchover...........................................16-212
16.4.2
Frost protection......................................................................................16-212
16.4.3Forced pump operation..........................................................................16-213
16.4.4Return flow temperature limitation...........................................................16-213
16.4.5Condensate accumulation control............................................................16-215
16.4.6
Three-step control...................................................................................16-215
16.4.7
On/off control.......................................................................................16-216

EB 5578 EN

Contents

16.4.8Continuous control in control circuit HC1..................................................16-216
16.4.9Releasing a control circuit/controller with binary input..............................16-217
16.4.10 Speed control of the charging pump........................................................16-217
16.4.11 Processing an external demand...............................................................16-218
16.4.12 External demand using a 0 to 10 V signal...............................................16-220
16.4.13 Capacity limitation in RK1......................................................................16-221
16.4.14 Creep feed rate limitation with a binary input...........................................16-222
16.4.15 Device bus.............................................................................................16-222
16.4.15.1 Requesting and processing an external demand.......................................16-223
16.4.15.2 Sending and receiving outdoor temperatures............................................16-225
16.4.15.3 Synchronizing the clock..........................................................................16-225
16.4.15.4 Priority over all controllers......................................................................16-226
16.4.15.5 Display error messages issued by the device bus......................................16-226
16.4.16 Activating TROVIS I/O expansion modules..............................................16-227
16.4.17 Connecting potentiometers for valve position input....................................16-228
16.4.18 Locking manual level..............................................................................16-228
16.4.19 Locking the rotary switch........................................................................16-228
16.4.20 Feeder pump operation..........................................................................16-228
16.4.21 Speed control of the circulation pump (DHW)...........................................16-229
16.4.22 External demand for heat due to insufficient heat supply...........................16-229
16.5
Communication.....................................................................................16-230
16.5.1
RS-485 communication module...............................................................16-230
16.5.2
Meter bus..............................................................................................16-231
16.5.2.1 Activating the meter bus.........................................................................16-231
16.5.2.2 Flow rate and/or capacity limitation with meter bus.................................16-232
16.5.3Return flow temperature limitation based on capacity................................16-235
16.5.4
Memory module/mini module................................................................16-235
16.5.5
Data logging.........................................................................................16-237
16.6
Function block lists.................................................................................16-239
16.7
Parameter lists.......................................................................................16-267
16.8
Customer-specific data...........................................................................16-276
17
17.1
17.2

Annex B....................................................................................................17-1
Accessories...............................................................................................17-1
After-sales service......................................................................................17-2

EB 5578 EN

Safety instructions and measures

1 Safety instructions and measures
Intended use
The TROVIS 5578 Heating and District Heating Controller is used to control up to three control circuits:− Control of a primary heat exchanger or boiler with up to two mixing heating circuit and
one non-mixing heating circuit (both outdoor-temperature-compensated) and control of
DHW heating in the secondary circuit− Outdoor-temperature-compensated buffer storage tank control with up to two mixing
heating circuits and continuous-flow hot water module− Control of two outdoor-temperature-compensated heating circuits and a DHW heatingwith three valves in the primary circuit− Control of three outdoor-temperature-compensated heating circuits with three valves in
the primary circuit− Applications with up to 6 control circuits are possible using optional TROVIS I/O expansion modules (linked by device bus).
The controller is designed to operate under exactly defined conditions. Therefore, operators
must ensure that the controller is only used in operating conditions that meet the specifications used at the ordering stage. In case operators intend to use the heating and district heating controller in applications or conditions other than those specified, contact SAMSON.
SAMSON does not assume any liability for damage resulting from the failure to use the device for its intended purpose or for damage caused by external forces or any other external
factors.
Î Refer to the technical data for limits and fields of application as well as possible uses.
Reasonably foreseeable misuse
The controller is not suitable for the following applications:− Use outside the limits defined during sizing and by the technical data
Furthermore, the following activities do not comply with the intended use:
− Use of non-original spare parts− Performing service and repair work not described

EB 5578 EN

1-1

Safety instructions and measures

Qualifications of operating personnel
The controller must be mounted, started up, serviced and repaired by fully trained and qualified personnel only; the accepted industry codes and practices must be observed. According
to these mounting and operating instructions, trained personnel refers to individuals who areable to judge the work they are assigned to and recognize possible hazards due to their specialized training, their knowledge and experience as well as their knowledge of the applicable standards.
Personal protective equipment
No personal protective equipment is required for the direct handling of the controller.
Revisions and other modifications
Revisions, conversions or other modifications of the product are not authorized by SAMSON.
They are performed at the user's own risk and may lead to safety hazards, for example. Furthermore, the product may no longer meet the requirements for its intended use.
Warning against residual hazards
The controller has direct influence on controlled components of the heating system (e.g. control valves and pumps). To avoid personal injury or property damage, plant operators andoperating personnel must prevent hazards that could be caused in the plant components by
the process medium, the operating pressure, the signal pressure or by moving parts by taking appropriate precautions. Plant operators and operating personnel must observe all hazard statements, warnings and caution notes in the referenced documents.
Responsibilities of the operator
Operators are responsible for proper use and compliance with the safety regulations. Operators are obliged to provide these mounting and operating instructions as well as the referenced documents to the operating personnel and to instruct them in proper operation. Furthermore, operators must ensure that operating personnel or third parties are not exposed toany danger.
Responsibilities of operating personnel
Operating personnel must read and understand these mounting and operating instructions
as well as the referenced documents and observe the specified hazard statements, warnings
and caution notes. Furthermore, operating personnel must be familiar with the applicablehealth, safety and accident prevention regulations and comply with them.

1-2

EB 5578 EN

Safety instructions and measures

Referenced standards, directives and regulations
The TROVIS 5578 Heating and District Heating Controller fulfills the requirements of the Directives 2014/30/EU, 2014/35/EU and 2011/65/EU. The declaration of conformity includes information about the applied conformity assessment procedure.
The controller is designed for use in low voltage installations.
Î For wiring, maintenance and repair, observe the relevant safety regulations.

1.1 Notes on possible severe personal injury! DANGER
Risk of fatal injury due to electric shock.
Î Before connecting wiring, performing any work on the controller or opening the controller, disconnect the supply voltage and protect it against unintentional reconnection.
Î Only use power interruption devices that can be protected against unintentional reconnection of the power supply.
Î Do not remove any covers to perform adjustment work on live parts.

1.2 Notes on possible property damage! NOTICE
Risk of damage to the controller due to the supply voltage exceeding the permissible tolerances.
The controller is designed for use in low voltage installations.
Î Observe the permissible tolerances of the supply voltage.

EB 5578 EN

1-3

Safety instructions and measures

Malfunction due to a configuration that does not meet the requirements of the application.
The controller is configured for specific applications by setting functions and parameters.
Function and parameter settings have a direct effect on final control elements.
Î Perform the configuration for the specific application.
Manipulation of the configuration due to unauthorized access.
The controller can be protected against unauthorized access through entering a key number.
The key number for first start-up can be found at the back of these mounting and operating
instructions.
Î Do not pass the key number on to unauthorized persons. Keep it in a safe place inaccessible to unauthorized persons.
Risk of controller damage due to large differences in temperature.
Î Before start-up, wait until the controller has reached the ambient temperature.
System damage caused by frost.
Frost protection is deactivated in the manual mode.
Î Do not run the heating during cold weather in the manual mode for long periods of time.

1-4

EB 5578 EN

Markings on the device

2 Markings on the device
2.1 Nameplate
The nameplate shown was up to date at the time of publication of this document. The nameplate on the device may differ from the one shown.

1

7
1

Type designation

2

Model number

3

Firmware version

4

Serial number

5

Fuse protection

6

Supply voltage

7

Date of manufacture

2
3
4

6

5

2.2 Firmware versions
Firmware revisions
Old

New

2.20

2.24
New systems Anl 1.9-1 and 1.9-2

2.24

2.26
New function: Error message (CO5 -> F07)
OT with 0-10 V function (CO5 -> F23) extended
Outdoor temperatures can be received or sent using a 0 to 10 V signal.

2.26

2.28
New system Anl 11.5
Alarm and event lists each with the last 100 entries

EB 5578 EN

2-1

Markings on the device

Firmware revisions
Old

New

2.28

2.30
It is possible to connect PTC or Ni 1000 sensors (Pt 1000 sensors only possible below
this firmware version)

2.30

2.41
Connected sensor inputs not relevant for closed-loop control are displayed on the 'Special values' screen in the controller's operating level
New buffer tank systems 3.9, 5.9, 17.1 and 17.8
New functions and parameters for buffer tank systems:− CO1 -> F22: SLP depending on return flow temperature− CO4 -> F23: Electric heating cartridge− CO5 -> F25: AA1 reverse− CO5 -> F26: AA2 reverse− CO5 -> F31: AE1 zero shift− PA1 -> P16: Minimum set point to charge buffer tank
− PA1 -> P17: Stop charging of the buffer tank
− PA1 -> P18: Charging temperature boost− PA1 -> P19: Lag time of charging pump
− PA4 -> P13: Maximum buffer tank temperature− PA4 -> P21: Return flow temperature limit, layering at top
New differential temperature control function (CO1 -> F23) in systems Anl 1.0 and
16.0
TROVIS 5570 Room Panel no longer available.
Restrictions when a mini module (order no. 1400-7436) is used

2.41

2.45
An active cold charging protection function allows the valve position to be determined
between 1 and 100 % (default 10 %).

2.45

2.48
Internal revisions

2-2

EB 5578 EN

Markings on the device

Firmware revisions
Old

New

2.48

2.51
New systems Anl 6.1 and 18.1 implemented
Systems Anl 9.1 and 9.2 now with feeder pump UP1
Configuration of up to three TROVIS I/O expansion modules possible
Operating status reading of DHW circuit in the operating level
Only the values that are not assigned to a partial plant scheme are shown the overallplant scheme: this now includes the demand to be processed.
Meaning of CO1, CO2, CO3 -> F02
F02 - 1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control active
Buffer tank systems: the measured value SF1 is now also relevant to end charging
Discharging protection for DHW tank and buffer tank
Separate boost adjustable for underfloor heating circuits
No restart, instead the drying of jointless floors continues after a power supply failure
Heating circuits can be configured to be circuits only processing demand with the settings CO1 -> F24 - 1, CO2 -> F24 - 1, CO3 -> F24 - 1
Transmission range setting for 0 to 10 V signal to process external demand changed to
CO5 -> F31
Default setting of heating characteristic 1.2 (0.5 for underfloor heating)Default setting of the maximum flow temperature: 70 °C
Delayed outdoor temperature adaptation adjustable in steps of 0.1 °C
Return flow temperature limitation based on capacity configurable
Default setting of heat meter mode: 'Continuous'

EB 5578 EN

2-3

Markings on the device

Firmware revisions
Old

New

2.51

2.61
New function Variable night set-back can be configured separately for each heating circuit (setting: CO1, CO2, CO3, CO11, CO12, CO13 -> F28 - 1)
Function blocks CO1 -> F27 and CO4 -> F27 introduced to activate the discharging
protection
Storage tank bottom sensor RüF2 can be configured as sensor to switch off the thermal
disinfection (setting: CO4 -> F24 - 1)
Free analog output assignment: configure CO5 -> F34 and F35 to determine which output signals are to be issued at AA1 and AA2.
The values of analog outputs AA1 and AA2 are saved with 0 to 100 % in the overall
scheme diagram.
The analog outputs AA1 and AA2 are available in manual mode.
Additional buffer tank bottom sensor SF3 can be configured in CO1 -> F25 - 1 setting. It
can be changed to be based on the outdoor temperature.
Another sensor can be configured as SF2 for speed control of the SLP (storage tankcharging pump).
New function: speed-controlled DHW circulation pump for control the circulation return
flow temperature using sensor RüF4/AF2
Device bus addresses in the range between 11 and 19 are available for addressing the
TROVIS I/O expansion modules.

2.61

2.63
New option configurable: 3 V supply for analog outputs

2-4

EB 5578 EN

Design and principle of operation

3 Design and principle of operation
The TROVIS 5578 Heating and District Heating Controller is used to control up to threecontrol circuits.
–

Control of a primary heat exchanger orboiler with up to two mixing heating
circuit and one non-mixing heating
circuit (both outdoor-temperaturecompensated) and control of DHW
heating in the secondary circuit

levels used to set function blocks are indicated by “CO” and the parameter levels are indicated by “PA”. Data is retrieved and entered at the controller using a rotary pushbutton. This process is facilitated by icons
and plain text displayed on the LCD. The rotary switch is used to set the operating modeand the parameters required for each circuit.
M-bus interface− Control of two outdoor-temperaturecompensated heating circuits and a
DHW heating with three valves in the
primary circuit

A maximum of three meters conforming to
EN 1434-3 can be connected for data transfer. In addition, heat meters for each control
circuit are available for flow rate and/or capacity limitation. Various limits can be adjusted for the different operating modes“Heating control only”, “Heating control with
DHW heating” and “DHW heating only” incontrol circuit RK1. Outdoor-temperature-compensated flow rate or capacity limitation can also be implemented.

− Control of three outdoor-temperaturecompensated heating circuits with threevalves in the primary circuit

3.1 Configuration using the
TROVIS-VIEW software− Outdoor-temperature-compensatedbuffer storage tank control with up to two
mixing heating circuits and continuousflow hot water module− Applications with up to 6 control circuits
are possible using optional TROVIS I/O
expansion modules (linked by device
bus).
The TROVIS 5578 Heating and District Heating Controller is adapted to the specific system by setting the appropriate system code
number. Additional sensors and/or functions
which are not part of the system's basic configuration can be selected over function
blocks. The switch positions and entry of the
key number allow access to the corresponding levels. For trained staff, the configuration

EB 5578 EN

The controller can be configured with the
TROVIS-VIEW software.
In this case, the TROVIS 5578 Heating andDistrict Heating Controller is connected to thecomputer at the RJ-45 jack on the side of thecontroller.
The TROVIS-VIEW software enables the user
to easily configure the controller as well asview process parameters online.

3-1

Design and principle of operation

Note
TROVIS-VIEW provides a uniform userinterface that allows users to configure andparameterize various SAMSON devices
using device-specific database modules. The
device module can be downloaded free ofcharge from our website atu www.samsongroup.com > SERVICE &SUPPORT > Downloads > TROVIS-VIEW .
Further information on TROVIS-VIEW (e.g.
system requirements) is available on our
website and in the Data Sheet u T 6661.

Note
SAM DISTRICT ENERGY is a web-based
solution for managing, controlling andoptimizing heating systems in the local heat
supply and district heating networks.
You can find more information and test SAM
DISTRICT ENERGY using a demo account on
our website at u www.samsongroup.com >Products & Applications > Digital solutions >SAM DISTRICT ENERGY.

3.2 Connection to SAM
DISTRICT ENERGY
The controller can be configured and operated on a computer, smartphone or tablet
computer using the SAM DISTRICT ENERGY
industry-specific application.
The controller is connected to SAM DISTRICTENERGY over the Modbus interface using acommunication gateway.
SAM DISTRICT ENERGY allows remote startup and set-up of the controllers. Key information of the controller and entire heating
system is clearly visualized at one central location.

3-2

EB 5578 EN

Design and principle of operation

3.3 Technical data
Inputs17x Pt 1000, PTC or Ni 1000 sensor inputs, alternatively configurable forbinary inputs
1x 0 to 10 V input (e.g. for external demand or outdoor temperature signal)
Input 17 for a pulse signal (3 to 800 pulses/h) of a heat meter for capacity
limitation in RK1

Outputs

3x three-step signal: rating max. 250 V AC, 2 A,
alternatively 3x on/off signal: rating max. 250 V AC, 2 A
5x pump output: rating max. 250 V AC, 2 A; all outputs are relay outputs
with varistor suppression
1x 0 to 10 V output (e.g. for continuous closed loop control, outdoor temperature, signal for external demand or pump speed control), load >5 kΩ
1x 0 to 10 V output for PWM signal for pump speed control

Interfaces

M-bus for up to three M-bus units, protocol according to EN 1434-3
Device bus interface (RS-485) for max. 32 bus devices (two-wire bus, reverse polarity protection)

Optional interfaces

Modbus RS-485 interface for two-wire bus using RS-485 communication
module(Modbus RTU protocol, data format 8N1, RJ-45 connector socket at theside)

Supply voltage

165 to 250 V, 48 to 62 Hz, max. 7 VA

Permissible ambient temperature range

0 to 40 °C (operation), –10 to +60 °C (storage and transport)

Degree of protection

IP 40 according to EN 60529

Class of protection

II according to EN 61140

Degree of contamination2 according to EN 61010-1

Overvoltage category

II according to EN 60664

Noise immunity

According to EN 61000-6-1

Noise emission

According to EN 61000-6-3

Conformity
WeightEB 5578 EN

Approx. 0.5 kg

3-3

Design and principle of operation

3.4 Dimensions

98

Panel cut-out 138 x 92

75

4

144

Fig. 3-1: Dimensions in mm

3-4

EB 5578 EN

Design and principle of operation

3.5 Values for resistance thermometers
Pt 1000 sensors
Temperature °C

–35

–30

–25

–20

–15

–10

Resistance Ω

862.5

882.2

901.9

921.6

941.2

960.9

980.4 1000.0 1019.5 1039.0 1058.5 1077.9

+25

+30

+35

+40

+45

+50

+55

Temperature °C
Resistance ΩTemperature °C
Resistance Ω

0

+5

+60

+65

+10

+70

+15

+75

+20

+80

1097.3 1116.7 1136.1 1155.4 1174.7 1194.0 1213.2 1232.4 1251.6 1270.8 1289.9 1309.0
+85

+90

+95

+100

+105

+110

+115

+120

+125

+130

+135

+140

1328.1 1347.1 1366.1 1385.1 1404.0 1422.9 1441.8 1460.7 1479.5 1498.3 1517.1 1535.8

Temperature °C +145
Resistance Ω

–5

+150

+155

+160

+165

+170

+175

+180

+185

+190

+195

+200

1554.6 1573.3 1591.9 1610.5 1629.1 1647.7 1666.3 1684.8 1703.3 1721.7 1740.2 1758.6

PTC sensor
Temperature °C

–20

–10

0

+10

+20

+30

+40

+50

Resistance Ω

693

756

824

896

971

1050

1133

1220

Temperature °C

+60

+70

+80

+90

+100

+110

+120

Resistance Ω

1311

1406

1505

1606

1713

1819

1925

Type 5244 (remote control unit)
Switch position, terminals 1 and 2

Temperature °C

10

15

20

25

30

Resistance Ω

679

699

720

741

762

Ni 1000 sensors
Temp. °C

–60

–50

–40

–30

–20

–10

0

+10

+20

+30

+40

Resistance Ω

695

743

791

841

893

946

1000

1056

1112

1171

1230

Temp. °C

+50

+60

+70

+80

+90

+100

+110

+120

+130

+140

+150

Resistance Ω

1291

1353

1417

1483

1549

1618

1688

1760

1833

1909

1986

Temp. °C

+160

+170

+180

+190

+200

+210

+220

+230

+240

+250

Resistance Ω

2066

2148

2232

2318

2407

2498

2592

2689

2789

2892

EB 5578 EN

3-5

3-6

EB 5578 EN

Shipment and on-site transport

4 Shipment and on-site transport

1x

TROVIS 5578 Heating and District
Heating Controller

1xDocument IP 5578
(Important Product Information)

The work described in this section is only tobe performed by personnel appropriately
qualified to carry out such tasks.

Fig. 4-1: Scope of delivery

4.1 Accepting the delivered
goods

4.3 Transporting the heating
controller

After receiving the shipment, proceed as follows:

Transport instructions

1. Compare the shipment received with thedelivery note.
2. Check the shipment for transportation
damage. Report any damage to
SAMSON and the forwarding agent(refer to delivery note).

4.2 Removing the packaging
from the controller
Note
Do not remove the packaging until immediately before mounting and start-up.
1. Remove the packaging from the controller.
2. Check scope of delivery (see Fig. 4-1).
3. Dispose and recycle the packaging in accordance with the local regulations.

EB 5578 EN− Protect the controller against external influences (e.g. impact).
− Protect the controller against moistureand dirt.
− Observe transport temperature depending on the permissible ambient temperature (see the 'Design and principle of operation' section).

4.4 Storing the controller! NOTICE
Risk of controller damage due to improper
storage.
Î Observe the storage instructions.
Î Avoid long storage times.
Î Contact SAMSON in case of different
storage conditions.
Note
We recommend to regularly check the controller and the prevailing storage conditions
during long storage periods.

4-1

Shipment and on-site transport

Storage instructions− Protect the controller against external influences (e.g. impact).
− Protect the controller against moistureand dirt. Store it at a relative humidity ofless than 75 %. In damp spaces, prevent
condensation. If necessary, use a drying
agent or heating.
− Make sure that the ambient air is free ofacids or other corrosive media.
− Observe transport temperature depending on the permissible ambient temperature (see the 'Design and principle of operation' section).
− Do not place any objects on the controller.

4-2

EB 5578 EN

Installation

5 Installation

Panel mounting

The work described in this section is only tobe performed by personnel appropriately
qualified to carry out such tasks.

2. Pull apart the controller housing and thebase.

5.1 Installation conditions
Work position
The work position for the controller is thefront view onto the operating controls on thecontroller seen from the position of operating
personnel.
Operators must ensure that, after installationof the controller, the operating personnel can
perform all necessary work safely and easily
access the device from the work position.

5.2 Preparation for installation

1. Undo the two screws (1).

3. Make panel cut-out with the dimensions
138 x 92 mm (W x H).
4. Push the controller housing through thepanel cut-out.
5. Tighten the two screws (2) to clamp thecontroller housing against the control
panel.
6. Perform electric wiring on the base as
described in section 5.4.
7. Remount the controller housing.
8. Tighten the two screws (1).
Wall mounting
1. Undo the two screws (1).

Before installation, make sure the following
conditions are met:

2. Pull apart the controller housing and thebase.

− The controller is not damaged.

3. If necessary, drill holes with the specified
dimensions in the appropriate places.
Fasten the base with four screws.

Proceed as follows:Î Lay out the necessary material and tools
to have them ready during installation
work.

5.3 Mounting the controller
The controller consists of the housing with theelectronics and the base with the terminals. It
is suitable for panel, wall and rail mounting(see Fig. 5-1).

EB 5578 EN

4. Perform electric wiring on the base as
described in section 5.4.
5. Remount the controller housing.
6. Tighten the two screws (1).
Rail mounting
1. Fasten the spring-loaded hook (4) at thebottom of the top hat rail (3).
2. Slightly push the controller upwards andpull the top hook (5) over the top hat rail.
Undo the two screws (1).

5-1Installation

Panel mounting

Wall mounting

Rail mounting(dimensions in mm)

Fig. 5-1: Installation

5-2

EB 5578 EN

Installation

3. Pull apart the controller housing and thebase.
4. Perform electric wiring on the base as
described in section 5.4.
5. Remount the controller housing.
6. Tighten the two screws (1).

5.4 Electrical connection! DANGER
Risk of fatal injury due to electric shock.
− For electrical installation, you are required
to observe the relevant electrotechnicalregulations of the country of use as well as
the regulations of the local power suppliers. Therefore, such work must be performed by trained and experienced personnel.
− The terminals 33, 39, 42 and 45 allow the
integration of safety equipment which havea direct influence on individual electric actuators and pumps. If this is not the case,connect a jumper from terminal 31 to terminals 33, 39, 42 and 45. Do not connect
ELV cables (according to VDE 0100) tothese terminals.
Î Before performing any work on the terminals, disconnect the voltage supply
from the heating controller.
Notes on electric wiring
Î Install the 230 V power supply lines andthe signal lines separately and awayfrom each other.
Î To increase immunity, keep a minimum
distance of 10 cm between the lines.

EB 5578 EN

Make sure the minimum distance is also
kept when the lines are installed in acabinet.
Î Install the lines for digital signals (buslines) and analog signals (sensor lines,
analog outputs) separately and awayfrom each other.
Î In plants with a high electromagnetic
noise level, we recommend using shielded cables for the analog signal lines.
Î Ground the shield at one side, either at
the control cabinet inlet or outlet, using
the largest possible cross-section. Connect the central grounding point and thePE grounding conductor with a cablewith at least 10 mm² wire cross-section
using the shortest route.
Î Inductances in the control cabinet, e.g.
contactor coils, must be equipped withsuitable interference suppressors (RC elements).
Î Shield control cabinet elements with highfield strength, e.g. transformers or frequency converters, with separators providing a good connection to the PE
grounding conductor.
Î Use wires with wire cross-sections as listed in Table 5-1 for terminals.
Overvoltage protection− If the signal lines are installed outsidebuildings or over large distances, makesure appropriate surge or overvoltage
protection measures are taken. Suchmeasures are indispensable for bus lines.
− The shield of signal lines installed outsidebuildings must have current conducting
5-3

Installation

capacity and must be grounded on bothsides.
− Surge diverters must be installed at thecontrol cabinet inlet.
Connecting the heating controller
Î If the controller housing and the basehave not yet been separated: unscrew
the screws on the bottom left and top
right of the housing to open it to connect
the wiring.
Î To feed through cables, make holes in themarked locations at the top, bottom orback of the base of the housing and fit
suitable grommets or cable glands.
Î For wall mounting: ensure that the lines
are not subject to torsion or bending by
taking suitable precautions, e.g. a cable
duct, before inserting them into the base.
Î Connect as shown in Fig. 5-2.

− Three-step or on/off outputs: connect cables with a minimum wire cross-sectionof 1.5 mm² suitable for damp locations
to the terminals of the controller output.
We recommend checking the operating
direction on start-up.
Connecting pumps
Connect all cables with a minimum 1.5 mm²
wire cross-section to the terminals of theheating controller as illustrated in the wiring
diagram.
Note
The electric actuators and pumps are not automatically supplied with a voltage by theheating controller. They can be connected
over terminals 33, 39, 42 and 45 to an external voltage source. For an internal power
supply, place a jumper from terminal 31 toterminals 33, 39, 42 and 45.

Connecting sensors
The wire cross-section of the sensor cables
must not be smaller than 0.5 mm².
Wiring of a room panelÎ Connect as shown in Fig. 5-3.
Connecting the water flow sensor
Î Connect as shown in Fig. 5-4.
Connecting actuators− 0 to 10 V control output: use cables witha minimum wire cross-section of
0.5 mm².

5-4

EB 5578 EN

Installation! DANGER
Risk of fatal injury as a result of failing toobserve the permissible touch voltage.
Separation of the circuits is absolutely
essential when SELV equipment is connected
to terminals 33, 39, 42 and 45 as thisequipment has a different intended use of
the supply voltage than specified in thetechnical data (230 V AC).
The creepage and clearance present in thebase and controller do not guarantee therequired dielectric strength and the safe
separation of the 230 V supply voltage andthe other circuits.
Î Take appropriate safety precautions (e.g.
by using coupling relays for the controlof electric actuators operated with 24 V
or for ELV fault signaling contacts).
Î Only connect 230 V equipment.

EB 5578 EN

5-5

BE1
BE2
BE3
BE4
BE5
BE6
BE7
BE8
BE9
BE10
BE11
BE12
BE13
BE14
BE15
BE16
BE17

5-6

30

28

26

24

22

20

18

16

14

12

10

8

6

4

2

SF3/FG3

FG1

RüF2

VF4

VF2

RF3

RF1

SF1

AF1

29

M-Bus
M-Bus
Device bus
Device bus

Rk3_2-Pkt47

Rk3_3-Pkt

L1

47

46

45
Rk2_2-Pkt

23

27

42

44

L1

41

40

44

Rk1_2-Pkt41

Rk1_3-Pkt

38

25

Sensor COM

37

ZP

39

36

35

SLP

L1

33

L1
34

32

N

UP3

UP2

UP1

31

L1

43

+ 0 ... 10 V out –+ 0/10 V out (PWM) –+ 0 ... 10 V in –

FG2

RüF3

RüF1

VF3

VF1

RF2

SF2

AF2

Rk2_3-Pkt

21

19

17

15

13

11

9

7

5

3

1

BA11

BA10

BA9

BA8

BA7

BA6

BA5

BA4

BA3

BA2

BA1

Installation

Fig. 5-2: Electrical connection of the TROVIS 5578 Heating Controller

EB 5578 EN

Installation

Legend for Fig. 5-2:
AF
BA
BE
FG
RF

Outdoor sensor
Binary output
Binary input
Potentiometer
Room sensor

RüF
SF
VF
RK

Return flow sensor
Storage tank sensor
Flow sensor
Control circuit

UP

Circulation pump(heating)
SLP Storage tankcharging pump
ZP Circulation pump
(DHW)

For RK1
Type 5257-5(x) Room Panel 1)
1

2

3

TROVIS 5578
15

18

5

For RK2
Type 5257-5(x) Room Panel 1)
1

2

3

TROVIS 5578
16

18

6

For RK3
Type 5257-5(x) Room Panel 1)
1

1)

2

3

TROVIS 5578
17

18

7

Type 5244 no longer available

Fig. 5-3: Wiring of a room panel for RK1, RK2 or RK3

EB 5578 EN

5-7

Installation

Water
flow sensor
Wasserströmungssensor
WH

GN

TROVIS 5578

BK

20

17

21

BN
GN
WH

Water flow sensor

Extension cable

TROVIS 5578

GND

BK

BN

20

Signal

GN

GN

17

5V

WH

WH

21

Wire end ferrule
WH
GN
BN

PVC 3 x 0.5 mm²
50

~
Ø
12

18.9

WH

BK

Nameplate GN
150

Jack

5

Connector
20

GN WH

BN

Cable tie
WH = white
GN = green
BN = brown
BK= blackFig. 5-4: Connection of a water flow sensor (see Accessories in the Annex)

5-8

EB 5578 EN

Installation! NOTICE
A flow rate measurement is not performed when the wrong model of the water flow
sensor is used.
Î Only use the sensor model specified in the Annex.
Table 5-1: Permissible wire cross-section for terminals
Cable

Wire cross-section

Single-wire

0.33 to 2 mm²Multi-wire

0.33 to 2 mm²Length of insulation to be stripped off wire ends: 6 mm

EB 5578 EN

5-9

Installation

5-10

EB 5578 EN

Operation

6 Operation
The heating controller is operated on site using the operating controls on the front.

6.1 Operating controls
The operating controls are located in the front panel of the controller.
Rotary pushbutton*

Turn [q]:Select readings, parameters and function blocks
Press [Û]:Confirm adjusted selection or settings

Rotary switch
The rotary switch is used to set the operating mode and the relevant parameters for eachcontrol circuit.
Operating level
Operating modes
Manual levelDay set point (rated room temperature)
Night set point (reduced room temperature)
Times-of-use for heating/DHW
Special time-of-use
Time/dateSettings

EB 5578 EN

6-1

Operation

6.2 Interfaces
6.2.1

M-bus interface

Data transmission of max. three meters according to EN 1434-3. See Annex A (configuration instructions).

6.2.2

Device bus interface RS-485

Connection of max. 32 bus devices (two-wire bus)

6.2.3

Optional interfaces

Modbus interface RS-485
Communication module
Using the optional RS-485 communication module (Modbus RTU interface
for two-wire bus networks), the
TROVIS 5578 Heating Controller cancommunicate with a control system. In
combination with a suitable software
for process visualization and communication, a complete control system canbe implemented.

GLT

RS-232C

RS-232
RS-485

RS-485

1

TROVIS 5578

Note
The operating software can be
updated over a data cable, provided
Modbus has been activated(CO6 -> F01 - 1). See Annex A(configuration instructions).

6-2

1

1: Optional RS-485 communication module
Fig. 6-1: Network structure

EB 5578 EN

Operation

Two-wire bus system
The optional RS-485 to computer communication module (order no. 8812-2002) is required
to connect the controller to a two-wire bus network for Modbus RTU communication with aprocess control system.
Modbus-TCP/IP communication and SAM DISTRICT ENERGY web application
The SAM MOBILE, SAM LAN or SAM HOME Gateway is required for Modbus-TCP/IP communication and for connection to the SAM DISTRICT ENERGY web application.

6.2.4

Accessories

TROVIS I/O (expansion module)

Order no. 1000062999

Memory module

Order no. 1400-9379

Mini module

Order no. 1400-7436

Data logging module

Order no. 1400-9378

USB converter 3 together with data log viewer software

Order no. 1400-9377

TROVIS-VIEW software (free of charge)

Link to download at: u www.samsongroup.com >SERVICE & SUPPORT > Downloads > TROVIS-VIEW

RS-485 communication module

Order no. 8812-2002

Surge arrester SA 5000

Order no. 1400-9868

u SAM HOME Gateway

Type 5660

u SAM MOBILE Gateway

Type 5655

u SAM-LAN Gateway
for communication using unlicensed radio
frequency bands

Type 5650

for communication over Ethernet
for communication using mobile phone
networks

EB 5578 EN

6-3

6-4

EB 5578 EN

Start-up and configuration

7 Start-up and configurationq

Operating levelÚ& key number
Display
contrast

Back

Displaylanguage

System

PA1

CO13

PA2

q

CO12

PA3

Configuration andparameter level

CO11

PA4

CO8

PA6

CO7

PA11

CO6

PA12

CO5

PA13
CO4

CO3

CO2

CO1

PA1/CO1:

HC1 (heating circuit 1)

PA13/CO13

PA2/CO2:

HC2 (heating circuit 2)

CO5:

HC13 (heating circuit 13)

PA3/CO3:

HC3 (heating circuit 3)

PA6/CO6:

PA4/CO4:

DHW circuit

CO7:

Device bus

PA11/CO11

HC11 (heating circuit 11)CO8Binary inputs

PA12/CO12

HC12 (heating circuit 12)

Anl:

System code number

System-wide
Communication

Fig. 7-1: Level structure of TROVIS 5578

EB 5578 EN

7-1

Start-up and configuration

The work described in this section is only to be performed by personnel appropriately qualified to carry out such tasks.
Before start-up, make sure the following conditions are met:
− The controller is properly mounted according to the instructions.
− The electrical connection is properly performed.
The controller is adapted to its control task by performing start-up. Start-up usually involves
performing several steps:
1. Change the contrast of the display to adapt it to the installation conditions (see section 7.1).
2. Change the display language as required for the operating personnel (see section 7.2).
3. Select the hydraulic system (see section 7.3).
4. Change functions and parameters to adapt the system (see sections 7.4 and 7.5).
5. Calibrate the sensors (see section 7.6).
The settings during start-up can only be performed after the valid key number has been entered.
The valid key number for first start-up can be found at the back of these mounting and operating instructions. To avoid unauthorized use of the service key number, remove the page ormake the key number unreadable. In addition, it is possible to enter a new, customized key
number (see section 7.7).

7-2

EB 5578 EN

Start-up and configuration

7.1 Altering the display contrast
The contrast of the display can be changed to adapt it to the installation conditions.
Turn the rotary switch to(settings).

T Enter the currently valid key number.
¼ Confirm key number.
T Select 'Display contrast'.
¼ Activate editing mode for the display contrast.
The current setting is shown inverted on the display.
T Set the display contrast¼ Confirm setting.
Turn the rotary switch back to(operating level).

7.2 Changing the display language
The default display language is German. The setting can be changed to English.
Turn the rotary switch to(settings).

T Enter the currently valid key number.
¼ Confirm key number.
T Select 'Display language'.
¼ Activate editing mode for the language setting.
The currently valid language is selected.
T Change the language setting accordingly.
¼ Confirm setting.
Turn the rotary switch back to

EB 5578 EN(operating level).

7-3

Start-up and configuration

7.3 Setting the system code number
Different hydraulic schematics are available. Each hydraulic schematic is represented by asystem code number. The systems together with their ready-configured functions are shown inAnnex A (configuration instructions). A system is adapted to individual requirements by setting the functions and parameters. Changing the system code number resets previously adjusted function blocks to their default settings (WE). Function block parameters and parameter level settings remain unchanged. The system code number is set in the configuration andparameter level.
Turn the rotary switch to(settings).

T Enter the currently valid key number.
¼ Confirm key number.

T Select 'System'.
¼ Open 'System'.

T Select the required system (see Annex A).

7-4

EB 5578 EN

Start-up and configuration¼ Confirm the system selected.
T Select 'Back'.
¼ Exit menu.
Turn the rotary switch to(settings).

7.4 Activating and deactivating functions
A function is activated or deactivated in the associated function block. Annex A (configuration instructions) contains a detailed description of all functions.
Turn the rotary switch to(settings).

T Enter the currently valid key number.
¼ Confirm key number.

T Select the required configuration level.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

CO1: Heating circuit HC1
CO2: Heating circuit HC2
CO3: Heating circuit HC3
CO11: Heating circuit HC11
CO12: Heating circuit HC12
CO13: Heating circuit HC13
CO4: Domestic hot water heating (DHW)
CO5: System-wide functions
CO6: Modbus communication

Active function blocks are indicated by the blacksquares.
Î Only those configuration levels are available for selection which can be controlled by the selected system.

EB 5578 EN

7-5

Start-up and configuration¼ Open configuration level.
The first function block is selected (marked gray).
T Select the required function.
Functions without function block parameters:¼ Activate editing mode for the function.
The currently active configuration '0' or '1' is shown inverted on the display.
T Activate function (1) or deactivate function (0).
¼ Confirm configuration.
Functions with function block parameters:¼ Open function.
T Select configuration.
¼ Activate editing mode for configuration.
The currently active configuration '0' or '1' is shown inverted on the display.
T Activate function (1) or deactivate function (0).
¼ Confirm configuration.
T Select function block parameter.
¼ Activate editing mode for function block parameter.
The current setting is shown inverted on the display.
T Set function block parameter.
Proceed in the same manner to set further function blocks.
Exit configuration level:
T Select 'Back'.
T Exit configuration level.
To adjust further function blocks in other configuration levels,
repeat steps with gray background.
Turn the rotary switch back to

7-6(operating level).

EB 5578 EN

Start-up and configuration

Note
All function block settings are saved in a non-volatile memory in the controller.

7.5 Changing parameters
Depending on the system code number selected and the activated functions, not all parameters might be available. Annex A (configuration instructions) contains a detailed descriptionof all parameters.
Turn the rotary switch to(settings).

T Enter the currently valid key number.
¼ Confirm key number.

T Select the required parameter level.
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

PA1: Heating circuit HC1
PA2: Heating circuit HC2
PA3: Heating circuit HC3
PA11: Heating circuit HC11
PA12: Heating circuit HC12
PA13: Heating circuit HC13
PA4: Domestic hot water heating (DHW)
PA5: Boiler circuit of buffer tank systems
PA6: Modbus communication

Î Only those parameter levels are available for selection
which can be controlled by the selected system.

EB 5578 EN

7-7

Start-up and configuration¼ Open parameter level.
The first parameter is selected (marked gray).
T Select parameter.
¼ Activate editing mode for the parameter.
The current setting is shown inverted on the display.
T Set the parameter.
¼ Confirm setting.
¼ Proceed in the same manner to change further parameters.
Exit parameter level.
T Select 'Back'.
T Exit configuration level.
To adjust further function blocks in other configuration levels,
repeat steps with gray background.
Turn the rotary switch back to(operating level).

Note
All parameter settings are saved in a non-volatile memory in the controller.

7.6 Calibrating sensors
Various temperatures are measured by temperature sensors which are connected to the controller. The controller is designed for connection of Pt1000, PTC and Ni1000 sensors.
− CO5 -> F01 - 1, F02 - 0: Pt 1000
− CO5 -> F01 - 0, F02 - 0: PTC− CO5 -> F01 - 1, F02 - 1: Ni 1000
Î The sensor resistance values are listed in the 'Design and principle of operation' section.

7-8

EB 5578 EN

Start-up and configuration

If the temperature values displayed at the controller differ from the actual temperatures, themeasured values of all connected sensors can be recalibrated. To calibrate a sensor, the currently displayed sensor value must be changed such that it matches the temperature (reference temperature) measured directly at the point of measurement. Sensor calibration is activated in CO5 in F20 function block. An incorrect sensor calibration can be deleted by setting
F20 - 0.
Turn the rotary switch to(settings).

T Enter the currently valid key number.
¼ Confirm key number.

¼ Select CO5 configuration level.
¼ Open CO5 configuration level.
¼ Select function block F20.
¼ Activate editing mode for F20 function block.

T Select F20 configuration.
¼ Activate editing mode for configuration.
The currently active configuration '0' or '1' is shown inverted on the display.
T Activate function block ('1').
¼ Confirm activation.

EB 5578 EN

7-9

Start-up and configuration¼ Select the temperature that you want to calibrate.
¼ Open calibration.
The temperature is shown inverted on the display.
¼ Correct measured value.
Read the actual temperature directly from the thermometer at the point of measurement and enter this value as
the reference temperature.
¼ Confirm corrected measured value.
¼ Proceed in the same manner to calibrate further sensors.
Exit configuration level:
T Select 'Back'.
T Exit configuration level.
Turn the rotary switch back to

7-10(operating level).

EB 5578 EN

Start-up and configuration

7.6.1

Special values
If sensor inputs not relevant for closed-loop control are connected, the 'Special values' screen is automatically displayed in the controller's operating level. A maximum of fivemeasured values (sensor inputs or 0 to 10 V input) can bedisplayed. These readings are displayed without a unit. '°C'
is the unit for all sensor inputs. The value originating fromthe 0 to 10 V input with the CO5 -> F25 - 1 setting is displayed as a percentage.

Measured value
numberTerminal number

Measured value
numberTerminal number

1

1

10

11

2

2

11

12

3

3

12

13

4

4

13

15

5

5

14

16

6

6

15

17

7

8

16

7

8

9

17

14

9

10

EB 5578 EN

7-11

7.7 Entering customized key number
To prevent the function and parameter settings being changed by unauthorized users, acustomized key number can be added to the fixed service key number. You can set thecustomized key number to be between 0100 and 1900.
Turn the rotary switch to(settings).

T Enter key number 1995.
¼ Confirm key number.
T Enter valid key number.
¼ Confirm key number.
T Enter customized key number.
¼ Confirm customized key number.
This number is the new key number.
Turn the rotary switch back to

7-12(operating level).

EB 5578 EN

Setup8 Setup
8.1 Selecting the operating mode
The controller can be operated in the following modes:
Day mode (rated operation): regardless of the programmed times-of-use and summer mode,the set points relevant for rated operation are used by the controller. Icon:
Night mode (reduced operation): regardless of the programmed times-of-use, the set points
relevant for reduced operation are used by the controller. Icon:
Control operation deactivated: regardless of the programmed times-of-use, control operation of the heating circuits and DHW heating remains deactivated. The frost protection is activated, if need be. Icon:
Icons when the frost protection is activated: HC, DHW
Automatic mode: During the programmed times-of-use, the controller works in day mode.
Outside these times-of-use, the controller is in night mode, unless control operation is deactivated depending on the outdoor temperature. The controller switches automatically between
both operating modes. Icon within the times-of-use:, icon outside the times-of-use:
Manual mode: valves and pumps can be controlled manually. For further details, see section 8.6.
Turn the rotary switch to(operating modes). The operating states of all system control circuits are displayed:− Heating circuit HC1− Heating circuit HC2− Heating circuit HC3− Heating circuit HC11
− Heating circuit HC12
− Heating circuit HC13
− DHW heating
Î Only those control circuits are available for selection
which can be controlled by the selected system.
T Select the control circuit.

EB 5578 EN

8-1

Setup¼ Activate editing mode for the control circuit. The operating mode is shown inverted on the display.
T Select the operating mode:
Automatic mode
Day modeNight mode
System deactivated¼ Confirm the operating mode.

The controller is usually in automatic mode.

8-2

EB 5578 EN

Setup

8.2 Schedules
The controller operates according to the schedules in automatic mode.

8.2.1

Setting the time and date

The current time and date need to be set immediately after start-up and after a power failure
lasting more than 24 hours. This is the case when the time blinks on the display.
Turn the rotary switch to(time/date). The current time isselected (gray background).

¼ Activate editing mode for the time. The time reading isinverted.
T Change the time.
¼ Confirm the time setting.

T Select 'Date' (dd.mm) [q].

¼ Activate editing mode for the date. The date reading isinverted.
T Change date (day.month).
¼ Confirm the date setting.

EB 5578 EN

8-3

SetupT Select 'Year'.

¼ Activate editing mode for the year. The year reading isinverted.
T Change the year.
¼ Confirm the year setting.
Deactivate or activate the automatic summer/standard timeswitchover as required.
T Select 'Auto summertime'.

¼ Activate the editing mode for automatic summer/standard time switchover. The current setting is shown inverted on the display:
ON = Summer/standard time switchover active
OFF = Summer/standard time switchover not active
T Deactivate or activate the automatic summer/standard
time switchover.
¼ Confirm deactivation/activation.
Turn the rotary switch back to(operating level).

Note
The correct time is guaranteed after a power failure of 24 hours. Normally, the correct timeis still retained at least 48 hours after a power failure.

8-4

EB 5578 EN

Setup8.2.2

Setting the times-of-use

Three times-of-use can be set for each day of the week.
Parameters

WE

Value range

HC1, HC2, HC3, DHW, CP
HC11, HC12, HC13
Start first time-of-use

06:00

00:00

Stop first time-of-use

22:00

24:00

Start second time-of-use

--:--

--:--

Stop second time-of-use

--:--

--:--

Start third time-of-use

--:--

--:--

Stop third time-of-use

--:--

--:--

00:00 to 24:00 hin steps of 15 minutes

Turn the rotary switch to(times-of-use). The first control
circuit is displayed together with its programmed times-ofuse.
T Program the times-of-use of another control circuit, if required:– Heating circuit HC2– Heating circuit HC3– Heating circuit HC11
– Heating circuit HC12
– Heating circuit HC13
– DHW heating– Circulation pump ZP
Î Only those control circuits are available for selection
which can be controlled by the selected system.
¼ Activate editing mode for the control circuit. The timesof-use for Monday are displayed.

EB 5578 EN

8-5

SetupT Select period/day for which the times-of-use are to bevalid. The times-of-use can be programmed for individual days or for a block of days, e.g. Monday to Friday,
Saturday and Sunday or Monday to Sunday. The selected days are shown inverted on the display.

¼ Activate editing mode for the period/day.
The start time of the first time-of-use period can now beedited (inverted reading).
T Change start time.
The time is set in steps of 15 minutes.
¼ Confirm the start time.
The stop time of the first time-of-use period can now beedited.
T End stop time.
The time is set in steps of 15 minutes.
¼ Confirm the stop time.
The start time of the second time-of-use period can now
be edited.
To set the second and third times-of-use periods, repeat
steps with gray background. If no further times-of-use are to
be programmed for the selected time period/day, exit themenu by confirming the indicated start time twice (2x Û).
Proceed in the same manner to program further periods/
days.
After setting all times-of-use:
T Select 'Back'.
¼ Exit the times-of-use setting.
Turn the rotary switch back to

8-6(operating level).

EB 5578 EN

Setup8.2.3

Setting the party timer (special time-of-use)

Rated operation in the corresponding control circuit (HC1, HC2, HC3 or DHW) is started orcontinued for the time period set in the party mode. When the party timer has elapsed, theparty timer returns to --:--.
Parameters

WE

Value range

HC1 party timer--:-- h0 to 48 h; in steps of 15 minutes

HC2 party timer--:-- h0 to 48 h; in steps of 15 minutes

HC3 party timer--:-- h0 to 48 h; in steps of 15 minutes

DHW party timer--:-- h0 to 48 h; in steps of 15 minutes

Turn the rotary switch to (special times-of-use). The party
timer for the first control circuit is now selected.
T Set time for party mode of another control circuit, if required:– Heating circuit HC2– Heating circuit HC3– DHW heating
Î Only those control circuits are available for selection
which can be controlled by the selected system.
¼ Activate editing mode for the party timer. The party timer is now in the editing mode (inverted display).
T Extend day operation as required.
The time is set in steps of 15 minutes.

EB 5578 EN

8-7

Setup¼ Confirm setting.
After setting the party timer:
Turn the rotary switch back to(operating level).

Note
The party timer runs down in steps of 15 minutes.

8.2.4

Programming public holidays (special times-of-use)

On public holidays, the times-of-use specified for Sunday apply.
A maximum of 20 public holidays may be entered.
Parameters

WE

Value range

Public holidays--:--

01.01 to 31.12

Turn the rotary switch to (special times-of-use). The party
timer for the first control circuit is now selected.
T Select 'Public holidays'.

¼ Start the public holiday setting. The first public holiday
setting is now selected. --:-- is displayed if no public holidays (default setting) have been programmed.
T Select --:--, if applicable.

8-8

EB 5578 EN

Setup¼ Activate editing mode for public holidays.
T Set the date of the public holiday.
¼ Confirm the date.
Proceed in the same manner to program further public holidays.
Deleting a public holiday:
T Select the holiday you wish to delete.
¼ Confirm the date.
T Select '--:--' setting¼ Confirm setting.
The public holiday is deleted.
After programming all public holidays:
T Select 'Back'.
¼ Exit the public holiday setting.
Turn the rotary switch back to(operating level).

Note
Public holidays that are not assigned to a specific dateshould be deleted by the end of the year so that they are notcarried on into the following year.

8.2.5

Programming vacation periods (special times-of-use)

The system runs constantly in reduced mode during vacation periods. A maximum of ten vacation periods can be entered. Each vacation period can be separately assigned to the heating circuits HC1, HC2, HC3 and DHW circuit or to all control circuits.
Note
If a vacation period is programmed to apply to all control circuits, it also applies to control
circuits HC11, HC12 and HC13.

EB 5578 EN

8-9

SetupParameters

Default

Value range

Vacation period--.-- - --.--

01.01 to 31.12

Turn the rotary switch to (special times-of-use). The party
timer for the first control circuit is now selected.
T Select 'Vacations'.

¼ Start the vacations setting. The first vacations setting is
now selected. --.-- - --.--.is displayed if no vacations (default setting) have been programmed.
T Select --.-- - --.--.

T Activate editing mode for vacations.
The start date can now be edited (inverted reading).
T Set the start date.
T Confirm the start date.
The end date can now be edited.
T Set the end date.

8-10

EB 5578 EN

Setup

T Confirm the year setting. 'All' is selected. The vacation
period then applies to all control circuits.
T If the vacation period is to be only valid for one control
circuit, select the required control circuit:– Heating circuit HC1– Heating circuit HC2– Heating circuit HC3– DHW heating
Î Only those control circuits are available for selection
which can be controlled by the selected system.
The control circuits HC11, HC12 and HC13 are notavailable.
¼ Confirm the control circuit.
Note
An active vacation period is indicated on the display by theicon.
Proceed in the same manner to program further vacations.
Deleting vacation periods:
T Select the start date of the period you wish to delete.
¼ Confirm vacation period.
T Select --.-- - --.--.
¼ Confirm setting.
The vacation period is deleted.

EB 5578 EN

8-11

SetupAfter programming all vacation periods:
T Select 'Back'.
¼ Exit the vacations setting.
Turn the rotary switch back to(operating level).

Note
Vacations should be deleted by the end of the year so thatthey are not carried on into the following year.

8.3 Entering day and night set points
The day set points apply during day mode (rated operation) and during times-of-use programmed for automatic mode.
The night set points apply during night mode (reduced operation) and outside the times-ofuse programmed for automatic mode.
The desired room temperature for the day and night set points can be programmed.
Switch position
Parameters

Default

Value range

HC1 room temperature

20.0 °C

0.0 to 40.0 °C

HC2 room temperature

20.0 °C

0.0 to 40.0 °C

HC3 room temperature

20.0 °C

0.0 to 40.0 °C

HC11 room temperature

20.0 °C

0.0 to 40.0 °C

HC12 room temperature

20.0 °C

0.0 to 40.0 °C

HC13 room temperature

20.0 °C

0.0 to 40.0 °C

DHW temperature

60.0 °C

Min. to max. DHW temperature

HC1 OT deactivation value

22.0 °C

0.0 to 50.0 °C

HC2 OT deactivation value

22.0 °C

0.0 to 50.0 °C

HC3 OT deactivation value

22.0 °C

0.0 to 50.0 °C

HC11 OT deactivation value

22.0 °C

0.0 to 50.0 °C

HC12 OT deactivation value

22.0 °C

0.0 to 50.0 °C

HC13 OT deactivation value

22.0 °C

0.0 to 50.0 °C

8-12

EB 5578 EN

SetupSwitch position
Parameters

Default

Value range

HC1 room temperature

15.0 °C

0.0 to 40.0 °C

HC2 room temperature

15.0 °C

0.0 to 40.0 °C

HC3 room temperature

15.0 °C

0.0 to 40.0 °C

HC11 room temperature

15.0 °C

0.0 to 40.0 °C

HC12 room temperature

15.0 °C

0.0 to 40.0 °C

HC13 room temperature

15.0 °C

0.0 to 40.0 °C

DHW temperature

40.0 °C

Min. to max. DHW temperature

HC1 OT deactivation value

15.0 °C–50.0 to 50.0 °C

HC2 OT deactivation value

15.0 °C–50.0 to 50.0 °C

HC3 OT deactivation value

15.0 °C–50.0 to 50.0 °C

HC11 OT deactivation value

15.0 °C–50.0 to 50.0 °C

HC12 OT deactivation value

15.0 °C–50.0 to 50.0 °C

HC13 OT deactivation value

15.0 °C–50.0 to 50.0 °C

Turn the rotary switch to(day set point) or(night set
point). The day or night set points appear on the display
one after the other.
Î Only those day and night set points are available for selection which can be controlled by the selected system.
Note
The deactivation values are located in a separate menu (deactivation values) for systems with three control circuits.
T Select the set point.

EB 5578 EN

8-13

Setup¼ Activate editing mode for set point.
T Adjust the set point.
¼ Confirm setting.
Proceed in the same manner to adjust further set points.
After adjusting all the set points:
Turn the rotary switch back to(operating level).

8.4 Reset to default settings
All parameters set over the rotary switch as well as parameters in the PA1 and PA2 parameter levels can be reset to their default settings (WE). This does not apply to the maximum flow
temperature and the return flow temperature limits in PA1 and PA2.
Turn the rotary switch to(settings).

T Enter key number 1991.
¼ Confirm key number.
The settings are reset when the following icon appearson the controller display:

8.5 Reading information
Different kinds of information can read off the controller display during operation. The controller display usually shows the date, time and the actual temperature when the rotary switch
is switched to the 'Operating level' position.
Outdoor-temperature-compensated control · Current temperature = outdoor temperature

Deactivation depending on
outdoor temperature active)

8-14

Vacations active

EB 5578 EN

SetupFixed set point control · Current temperature = Flow temperature

Further information can be obtained by turning the rotary pushbutton:
T Operating state
The following applies for heating circuits HC1, HC2,
HC3, HC11, HC12 and HC13:

Current operat- Current posiing modetioning value
Circulation pumpHeatingValve
opens(heating) ON/OFF
circuitcloses

The following applies for DHW heating:Current operating
mode
Pump ON/OFF
Storage tank charging pump
Circulation pump (DHW)
Solar circuit pump

T Selected system code number
See Annex A (configuration instructions) for further information.

EB 5578 EN

8-15

Setup¼ Key measured values for the entire system (e.g. measured values and limits of a flow rate or capacity limitation or the demand to be processed) are shown, if activated.

T Times-of-use (depending on system code number)
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Heating circuit HC1
Heating circuit HC2
Heating circuit HC3
Heating circuit HC11
Heating circuit HC12
Heating circuit HC13
DHW heating

The day mode times is highlighted in black on the time
chart.
Night mode and deactivation times are highlighted ingray on the time chart.
¼ Measured values, set points and limits of the system section shown are displayed.
The 'DHW values' page also includes information on the operating state of the DHW heating.
The following messages are generated:− 'Standby'− 'Monitoring'− 'Circulation' (= circulation losses are compensated for)− 'Demand'− 'Charging'− 'Lag time'− 'Intermediate heating'− 'Discharging protection'

8-16

EB 5578 EN

Setup

T Alarm list
The last four alarm entries are listed.
¼ Open the alarm list and select further alarm entries ().
Further information on an alarm (including time anddate when it occurred) runs across the display.

T Event list
The last four event entries are listed.
¼ Open the event list and select further event entries ().
Further information on an event (including time and datewhen it occurred) runs across the display.

T Trend-Viewer
The standard graph shows the data measured at the outdoor sensor AF1 and flow sensor VF1 plotted over time.

EB 5578 EN

8-17

SetupExtended operating level
The following details on the controller version (device identification, serial number, software and hardware versions)and meter bus are displayed in the extended operating level.
Turn the rotary switch to(settings).

T Enter code number 1999.
¼ Confirm key number.
Turn the rotary switch to(operating level).

T Select 'Information'.

The additional "meter" page is displayed with connection status and further meter data for meters 1 to 3 in the"extended operating level" mode when the meter bus isactivated (see Annex A). In addition, the respective measuring and limit values are displayed after confirming
the plant scheme when the flow rate and/or capacity
limitation is active.
Note− The additional information is hidden when the key number
1999 is entered again.
− The key number 1999 cannot be used to change the controller configuration and parameterization. A separate key
number exists for configuration and parameterization (seethe 'Start-up and configuration' section).

8-18

EB 5578 EN

Setup8.5.1

Adapting the Trend-Viewer

The standard graph shows the data measured at the outdoor sensor AF1 and flow sensor
VF1 plotted over time.
¼ Open the Trend-Viewer.
Adding measuring data
T Select – – – – on the display.
¼ Activate editing mode for sensor selection.
T Select the sensor.
¼ Confirm setting.
Deleting measured data:
T Select the sensor whose measured data are no longer tobe displayed.
¼ Activate editing mode for sensor.
T Select – – – – on the display.
¼ Confirm deletion.
Shifting the time line:
T Select 'Scroll'.
¼ Activate editing mode for scroll function.

T Shift the time line.
¼ Confirm time display.

EB 5578 EN

8-19

SetupZooming in/out
T Select 'Zoom'.
¼ Open zoom function.
T Zoom in or out.
¼ Confirm display.
Closing the Trend-Viewer
T Select 'Back'.
¼ Close the Trend-Viewer

8-20

EB 5578 EN

Setup

8.6 Operating the controller in manual mode
Switch to manual mode to configure all controller outputs.
! NOTICE
System damage caused by frost when manual operating mode is active!
The frost protection function is deactivated in the manual operating mode.
Î Do not run the heating during cold weather in the manual mode for long periods of time.
Manually changing the positioning value/switching state:
Turn the rotary switch to (manual mode). The outputs ofthe configured system are listed on the display.
T Select the output
Positioning value
Circulation pump (heating)Storage tank charging pump
Circulation pump (DHW)
Solar circuit pump
T Activate editing mode for the output.
T Change the positioning value/switching state.
T Confirm the positioning value/switching state.
The modified values remain active as long as the controller is in manual mode.
Turn the rotary switch tomode is deactivated.

(operating level). The manualNote
The outputs of the controller are not affected by merely turning the rotary switch to (manual mode). The outputs are only changed by entering or changing the positioning values orswitching states.

EB 5578 EN

8-21

8-22

EB 5578 EN

Malfunctions

9 Malfunctions
A malfunction is indicated by the blinking icon on the display. Additionally, the display isilluminated for one second every 10 seconds upon sensor failure. Press the rotary pushbutton
to open the error level. As long as an malfunction exits, the error message is included in thereading loop, even when it has not been opened by pressing the rotary pushbutton.
In the error level, the error message is displayed as specified in the following list (see section 9.1).
! DANGER
Risk of electric shock while performing electrical connection.
For electrical installation, you are required to observe the relevant electrotechnical regulations of the country of use as well as the regulations of the local power suppliers.
Î Only allow properly trained and experienced personnel perform the wiring.
! NOTICE
Risk of damage to the heating controller due to incorrectly performed work.
Î Only properly trained personnel appropriately qualified to carry out such tasks must beallowed to perform corrective action.
Note
After the system code number has been changed or after restarting the heating controller,
any error messages are suppressed for approx. three minutes.

EB 5578 EN

9-1

Malfunctions

9.1 Error list
Sensor failure= Sensor failure (see section 9.2)

Err TROVIS I/O= TROVIS I/O communication error

Disinfection= Disinfection temperature not reached. See 'Thermal disinfection of DHW storage tank' function in Annex A (configuration instructions).

Max. charging temp.

= Max. charging temperature reached. See 'DHW heatingin the storage tank charging system' function in Annex A(configuration instructions).

External= Error message from device bus

Temp. monitoring= Temperature monitor alarm

Unauthorized access= Unauthorized access occurred (see section 9.4)

Binary alarm= Error message of a binary input

Meter bus

= Meter bus communication error

Heat meter= Heat meter error registered

Note
If the error messages or indications that can be confirmed are included in the list shown, you
can decide whether you want to confirm these error messages on exiting the error list.

9.2 Sensor failure
As described in the error list, sensor failures are indicated by the 'Sensor failure' error message in the error level. For detailed information, exit the error level and view the different
temperature values in the information level: each sensor icon displayed together with threedashes instead of the measured value indicates a defective sensor. The following list explains
how the heating controller responds to the failure of the different sensors.
− Outdoor sensor AF1/2: when the outdoor sensor fails, the controller uses a flow temperature set point of 50 °C or the 'Max. flow temperature' when the max. flow temperature (PA1, 2, 3 -> P07) is lower than 50 °C. With the setting CO1, 2, 3 -> F05 - 1 (underfloor heating), the flow temperature set point is 30 °C in the event of a malfunction.

9-2

EB 5578 EN

Malfunctions− Flow sensor(s) in heating circuit(s): when the flow sensors in the heating circuits are defective, the associated valve moves to 30 % travel. DHW heating which use such a sensor
to measure the charging temperature is suspended. DHW heating which use such a sensor to measure the charging temperature is suspended.
− Flow sensors in the DHW circuit with control valve: when the DHW circuit has two
charging temperature sensors VF2 and VF4, the controller behaves as if VF4 sensor has
not been configured if it is defective. As soon as the control of the charging temperatureusing the VF2 sensor or the DHW temperature becomes impossible, the associated valve
is closed.
− Return flow sensor: when the return flow sensor fails, the controller continues operation
without return flow temperature limitation.
− Room sensor RF: when the room sensor fails, the controller uses the settings for operation
without room sensor. The controller, for example switches from optimizing mode to reduced operation. The adaptation mode is canceled. The last determined heating characteristic remains unchanged.
− Storage tank sensors SF1/2: when one of the two sensors fails, the storage tank is nolonger charged (exception: solar system).
− Solar circuit sensors SF, VF/RüF: when one of the two sensors fails, the storage tank inthe solar circuit is no longer charged.

9.3 Temperature monitoring
When a system deviation greater than 10 °C persists in a control circuit for 30 minutes, the'Temp. monitoring' message is generated.
Functions

WE

Configuration

Monitoring

0

CO5 -> F19 - 1

9.4 Fault alarm output
With the setting CO5 -> F07 - 1, the output at terminals 37, 38, 43 or the output at terminal
46 is used for fault indication (specific terminals listed in the table of each system). The fault
alarm output is activated (bA = 1 setting) or deactivated (bA = 0 setting) when at least one of
the errors from the error list (bold) occurs.
This function is not available for systems Anl 5.1, 5.2, 5.9, 6.1, 9.1, 9.2, 9.5, 9.6, 12.1,
12.2, 13.1, 13.2, 13.6, 15.1, 15.2, 15.3, 17.8, 21.1 and 21.2.

EB 5578 EN

9-3

Malfunctions

Functions

WE

Fault alarm output at terminal 37,
038, 43 or 46 (depending on the sys1
tem selected)

Configuration
CO5 -> F07 - 1
bA = 1, 0

9.5 Error status register
The error status register is used to indicate controller or system errors. The error messages
which cause a change in the state of the configured fault alarm output (CO5 -> F07 - 1) arehighlighted in the following table (bold).
The function blocks in the CO8 configuration level allow single controller inputs that are notused to be added to the error status register as binary inputs. Either an open or closed binary input can be configured to indicate an error. The controller indicates 'Binary alarm' whenat least one of the inputs configured in this way registers an error.
Note
If free inputs are to issue binary signals to a building control station without affecting the error status register, activate the corresponding function block in the CO8 configuration leveland select 'None' as the function block parameter.
Error message

Decimal value

Sensor failure

1

TROVIS I/O failure

2

Disinfection

4

Max. charging temp.

8External

16

Temp. monitoring

32

Unauthorized access

64

Binary alarm

128

Meter bus

256

Heat meter

512

1

32

Total
Example: Value of error status register when a sensor fails and a temperature monitoringalarm =

9-4

33

EB 5578 EN

Servicing

10 Servicing
The work described in this section is only to be performed by personnel appropriately qualified to carry out such tasks.
We recommend inspection and testing according to Table 10-1.
Table 10-1: Recommended inspection and testing
Inspection and testing

Action to be taken in the event of a negative
resultCheck the markings, labels and nameplates on
the controller for their readability andcompleteness.

Î Immediately renew damaged, missing or
incorrect nameplates or labels.

Check the electric wiring.

Î If any wires are loose, open the controller
housing and tighten the terminal screws (seethe 'Installation' section).

Î Clean any inscriptions that are covered withdirt and are illegible.

Î Renew damaged wires.
Compare the temperature values displayed at the Î If the displayed and actual temperatures differ,
controller with the actual temperatures at the pointcalibrate the sensors (see the' Start-up andof measurement.
configuration' section).

EB 5578 EN

10-1

10-2

EB 5578 EN

Decommissioning

11 Decommissioning
The work described in this section is only tobe performed by personnel appropriately
qualified to carry out such tasks.

Î Disconnect the electrical wires from theterminals.
Î Pull the wires out of the cable ducts.

! DANGER
Risk of fatal injury due to electric shock.
Î Before disconnecting live wires, switch
off the supply voltage at the controller
and protect it against unintentional reconnection.
To put the controller out of operation, thecontroller must be disconnected from thevoltage supply:
Î Controller connected to a control station:
log the controller off from the control
station and remove the communication
module from the RJ-45 jack.
Î Controller connected to TROVIS-VIEW:
remove the connecting cable from the RJ45 jack.
Î If a memory module/mini module or
logging module is used: save data andremove the memory module/mini
module or logging module from the the
RJ-45 jack.
Î Disconnect the supply voltage and protect it against unintentional reconnection.
Î Unscrew the top left and right screws on
the front of the controller to open thecontroller housing.

EB 5578 EN

11-1

11-2

EB 5578 EN

Removal

12 Removal
The work described in this section is only tobe performed by personnel appropriately
qualified to carry out such tasks.
Panel mounting
1. Put the controller out of operation (seethe 'Decommissioning' section).
2. Unscrew the top left and bottom rightscrews to unfasten the controller housingfrom the control panel.
Wall mounting
1. Put the controller out of operation (seethe 'Decommissioning' section).
2. Unscrew the fastening screws and remove the back of the housing from thewall.
Rail mounting
1. Put the controller out of operation (seethe 'Decommissioning' section).
2. Unscrew the top left and bottom rightscrews to unfasten the controller housingfrom the top-hat rail.

EB 5578 EN

12-1

12-2

EB 5578 EN

Repairs

13 Repairs
A defective controller must be repaired or replaced.
! NOTICE
Risk of controller damage due to incorrect
service or repair work.
Î Do not perform any repair work on yourown.
Î Contact SAMSON's After-sales Service
for service and repair work.

13.1 Returning devices to
SAMSON
Defective controllers can be returned to
SAMSON for repair.
Proceed as follows to return devices to
SAMSON:
1. Put the controller out of operation (seethe 'Decommissioning' section).
2. Remove the controller (see the 'Removal'
section).
3. Proceed as described on the Returning
goods page of our website
u www.samsongroup.com > Service &Support > After-sales Service > Returning
goods

EB 5578 EN

13-1

13-2

EB 5578 EN

Disposal

14 Disposal
SAMSON is a producer
registered at the following
European institution
u https://www.ewrn.org/
national-registers/nationalregisters.
WEEE reg. no.:DE 62194439/FR 025665

Î Observe local, national and international refuse regulations.
Î Do not dispose of components, lubricantsand hazardous substances together withyour other household waste.
Note
We can provide you with a recycling
passport according to PAS 1049
on request. Simply e-mail us ataftersalesservice@samsongroup.com giving
details of your company address.
Tip
On request, we can appoint a service provider to dismantle and recycle the product.

EB 5578 EN

14-1

14-2

EB 5578 EN

Certificates

15 Certificates
The following certificate is shown on the next page:− EU declaration of conformity
The certificate shown was up to date at the time of publishing. The latest certificates can befound on our website:
u www.samsongroup.com > Products & Applications > Product selector > Automation
Systems > 5578

EB 5578 EN

15-1

Certificates

EU declaration of conformity

EU Konformitätserklärung / EU Declaration of Conformity /Déclaration UE de conformité
Die alleinige Verantwortung für die Ausstellung dieser Konformitätserklärung trägt der Hersteller/
This declaration of conformity is issued under the sole responsibility of the manufacturer/
La présente déclaration de conformité est établie sous la seule responsabilité du fabricant.
Für das folgende Produkt / For the following product / Nous certifions que le produit

Heizungs- und Fernheizungsregler / Heating and District Heating Controller /Régulateur de chauffage et de chauffage à distance
Typ/Type/Type TROVIS 5578
wird die Konformität mit den einschlägigen Harmonisierungsrechtsvorschriften der Union bestätigt /the conformity with the relevant Union harmonisation legislation is declared with/
est conforme à la législation d'harmonisation de l'Union applicable selon les normes:

EMC 2014/30/EU

EN 61000-6-1:2007, EN 61000-6-3:2007+A1:2011

LVD 2014/35/EU

EN 60730-1:2016

RoHS 2011/65/EU

EN 50581:2012

Hersteller / Manufacturer / Fabricant:
SAMSON AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
Weismüllerstraße 3D-60314 Frankfurt am Main
Deutschland/Germany/Allemagne

ce_5578-0_de_en_fra_rev07.pdf

Frankfurt / Francfort, 2017-07-29
Im Namen des Herstellers/ On behalf of the Manufacturer/ Au nom du fabricant.

Gert Nahler
Zentralabteilungsleiter/Head of Department/Chef du département
Entwicklung Automation und Integrationstechnologien/
Development Automation and Integration Technologies

SAMSON AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
Weismüllerstraße 3 60314 Frankfurt am Main

15-2

Hanno Zager
Leiter Qualitätssicherung/Head of Quality Managment/
Responsable de l'assurance de la qualité

Telefon: 069 4009-0 · Telefax: 069 4009-1507
E-Mail: samson@samson.de

Revison 07

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

16 Annex A (configuration instructions)This annex contains information on the configuration of the controller.

16.1 Systems
Different hydraulic schematics are available. The system images on the display show thestructure of the hydraulic system.
Boiler systems:
Single-stage boiler systems can be configured to include any system whose heating circuits
and DHW circuit include just one heat exchanger. These systems are 1.0-1, 1.5-1, 1.6-1,
1.6-2, 1.7-1, 1.8-1, 1.8-2, 1.9, 2.x, 3.x, 4.x, 5.x, 6.0, 7.x, 8.x, 9.x, 11.1-3, 14.x, 15.x,
16.x and 17.x.
The boiler can be controlled by an on/off output (CO1 -> F12 - 0).
Single-stage
boiler

RK1

RüF1

VF1

UP1

BE
BA
AE
RK

RK1_on/off

RF1

VF1

UP1

RF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

Fig. 16-1: Configuration of a boiler system

EB 5578 EN

16-1

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 1.0-1

RK1

RüF1

VF1

UP1

RF1

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System1.0-1

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)

16-2− Differential temperature control

When CO1 -> F23 - 1− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 1.0-2

RK1
UP1

AF1

RüF1
VF1

RF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System1.0-2

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)EB 5578 EN− Differential temperature control

When CO1 -> F23 - 1− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-3

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 1.1-1

WWKW
SLP (RK2)
RK1

UP1
RüF1

RF1
VF1

SF1
VF4

ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System1.1-1

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 0 (without RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)

16-4− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 1.1-2
WW

KW

UP1
RK1

VF1

RüF1

VF4

SLP

SF1

RF1

ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

1.1-2

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 0 (without RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-5

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 1.2
WW

KW

UP1
RK1

VF1

RüF1

VF4

UP2

SF2

RF1

SLP

SF1
ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

1.2

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 0 (without RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)

16-6− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 1.3-1

WW

KW

SLP
RK1

UP1
RüF1

VF4

RF1

BA9

VF3

VF1

SF3

SF1
ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System1.3-1

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 0 (without RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-7

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 1.3-2
WW

KW

UP1
RK1

VF1

RüF1

SLP

VF4

BA9

SF3

VF3

RF1

SF1
ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

1.3-2

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 0 (without RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)16-8− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 1.4

WW

KW

UP1

RK1

VF1

RüF1 RF1 UP2VF4VF3 BA9SLP

SF3 ZP SF2

SF1

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

1.4

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 0 (without RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-9

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 1.5-1
WW

KW
RK1

SF1

SLP
RüF1

ZP

VF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System1.5-1

Default setting
CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)

16-10− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 1.5-2
WW

KW

SLP

SF1

VF1
RK1

RüF1

ZP

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

1.5-2

Default setting
CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1

16-11

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 1.6-1
WW

KW

VF1
RK1

RüF1

SF2
SLP

SF1
ZP

BE
BA
AE
RK

System1.6-1

Default setting
CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F10- 0 (DHW circulation return flow in storage tank)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)16-12− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 1.6-2
WW

KW

UP1
RK1

VF1

VF4

RüF1

SF2
SLP

SF1
ZP

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

1.6-2

Default setting
CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4; in this case, VF1 usually installed at the point of measurement of VF4)

CO4 -> F10- 0 (DHW circulation return flow in storage tank)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1

16-13

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 1.6-3
WW

KW

UP1

VF1
RK1

SF2

VF4
RüF1

SLP

SF1
ZP

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

1.6-3

Default setting
CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4; in this case, VF1 usually installed at the point of measurement of VF4)

CO4 -> F10- 0 (DHW circulation return flow in storage tank)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)

16-14− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 1.7-1
WW

KW

SLP
RK1

BA9

VF1

SF3

VF3

RüF1

SF1
ZP

BE
BA
AE
AA

System1.7-1

Default setting
CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1

16-15

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 1.7-2
WW

KW

RK1

RüF1

VF1

VF3

SLP

BA9

SF3

ZP

SF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

1.7-2

Default setting
CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)

16-16− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 1.8-1
WW

KW

VF1
RK1

RüF1

BA9

VF3

SF3
SLP

SF2
ZP

SF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System1.8-1

Default setting
CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F10- 0 (DHW circulation return flow in storage tank)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1

16-17

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 1.8-2
WW

KW

UP1
RK1

VF1

VF4

RüF1

BA9

VF3

SF3
SLP

SF2
ZP

SF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

1.8-2

Default setting
CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F05

0 (without VF4; in this case, VF1 usually installed at the point of measurement of VF4)

CO4 -> F10- 0 (DHW circulation return flow in storage tank)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)

16-18− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 1.8-3
WW

KW

UP1

VF1
RK1

VF4
RüF1

VF3

BA9

SF3

SF2
ZP

SLP

SF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

1.8-3

Default setting
CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4; in this case, VF1 usually installed at the point of measurement of VF4)

CO4 -> F10- 0 (DHW circulation return flow in storage tank)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1

16-19

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 1.9-1
WW

KW
RüF2

VF2

RK2

SF1
BE17

ZP

BE
BA
AE
RK

System1.9-1

Default setting
CO4 -> F01- 0 (without SF1)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F04- 0 (without flow rate sensor)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 37)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− 10 V supply

16-20− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 1.9-2
WW

KW
UP2

RüF2

VF2

RK2

SF1
BE17

ZP

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

1.9-2

Default setting
CO4 -> F01- 0 (without SF1)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F04- 0 (without flow rate sensor)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 37)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− 10 V supply

EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1

16-21

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 2.0
WW

KW

RK1
VF1

SF1

RF1

UP1
RüF1

AF1

ZP

SLP (RK2)

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

2.0

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)

16-22− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 2.1
WW

KW

RK1

UP1
RüF1

SF1

RF1

VF1

AF1

ZP

SLP

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

2.1

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-23

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 2.2
WW

KW

RK1

VF1
RüF1

UP1

VF4

UP2
RF1

SF2
SLP

SF1

AF1

ZP

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

2.2

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)

16-24− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 2.3
WW

KW

RK1

UP1
RüF1

BA9

RF1

VF1

SLP

VF3

SF3

SF1

AF1

ZP

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

2.3

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-25

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 2.4
WW

KW

RK1

UP1
RüF1

VF4

RF1

VF1

BA9

VF3

UP2

SF3
SLP

SF2
ZP

AF1

SF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

2.4

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)

16-26− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 3.0

RK1

VF1
RüF1

RK2

UP2 UP1

RüF2
VF2

UP1

AF1

RF2

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

3.0

Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03

0 (without RüF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 37)

CO5 -> F14- 0 (UP1 only active during the processing for an external demand)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y1 (RK1)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-27

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 3.1

WW

KW
RK1

VF1
RüF1

RK2

UP2

RüF2
VF2

SF1

SLP

AF1

ZP

RF2

BE
BA
AE
AA

System

3.1

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)16-28− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 3.2
WW

KW

RK1

VF1
RüF1

RK2

UP2

RüF2
VF2

RF2

UP1

VF4

SF2
SLP

SF1

AF1

ZP

BE
BA
AE
RK

EB 5578 EN

16-29

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System

3.2

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4)

CO4 -> F10- 0 (DHW circulation return flow in storage tank)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)16-30− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 3.3
WW

KW
ZP
RK1

VF1
RüF1

RK2

UP2

RüF2
VF2

UP1

SLP

SF3

SF1

AF1

VF3

RF2

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

3.3

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-31

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 3.4
WW

KW

RK1

VF1
RüF1

RK2

UP2

RüF2
VF2

RF2

UP1

VF4
VF3

UP3

SF3
SLP

SF2
ZP

AF1

SF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

16-32

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System

3.4

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4)

CO4 -> F10- 0 (DHW circulation return flow in storage tank)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-33

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 3.5

RK1

UP1
RüF1

VF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System3.5

Note:

Closed control circuit and UP1 are only active during the processing for an
external demand.

Default settings
CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− External demand

16-34

When CO1 -> F18 - 1

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 3.9

E-Heizung

WW

KW

RüF1
RK1

RK2
VF1

VF2
RüF2
UP2
RF2

SLP

SF1
SF2

UP1

RüF2/
RüF4

Y4
BA10

BE17
VF4
RüF3
ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
AA

EB 5578 EN

16-35

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System

3.9

Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO1 -> F06- 1 (with SF2)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2 in RK2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2/RüF4)

CO4 -> F04- 0 (without flow switch)

CO4 -> F14- 0 (without RüF3)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y4

16-36− SLP speed

When CO1 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 4.0

RK1

VF1
RüF1

RK2
UP2

RüF2
VF2

UP1
RF2

AF1
RF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

4.0

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 37)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-37

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 4.1
WW

KW

RK1

VF1
RüF1

RK2

UP2

RüF2
VF2

UP1
RF2

SF1

RF1

SLP

ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

4.1

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)16-38− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 4.2
WW

KW

RK1

VF1
RüF1

RK2

UP2

RüF2
VF2

UP1
RF2

UP3

RF1

VF4
SLP

SF2

SF1
ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

EB 5578 EN

16-39

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System

4.2

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)16-40− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 4.3
WW

KW

RK1

VF1
RüF1

RK2

UP2

RüF2
VF2

UP1
RF2

UP3

RF1

SLP

VF3

SF3

SF1
ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

4.3

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-41

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 4.5

WW

KW
RK1

VF1
RüF1

RK2
UP2

RüF2
VF2

UP1
RF2

AF1
RF1

SLP

ZP

SF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

4.5

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)16-42− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 5.0

UP1
RK1

VF1
RüF1

RK2
UP2

RüF2
VF2

RK3
RF2

UP3

RüF3
VF3

UP1

AF1

RF3

BE
BA
AE
RK

EB 5578 EN

16-43

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System5.0

RK2: CO2 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 37)

CO5 -> F14- 0 (UP1 only active during the processing for an external demand)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)16-44− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 5.1
WW

KW
RK1

VF1
RüF1

RK2

UP2

UP3

RüF2
VF2

RF2

RK3

VF3
SLP

RüF3
RF3

SF1

AF1

ZP

BE
BA
AE
RK

EB 5578 EN

16-45

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System5.1

RK2: CO2 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)16-46− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 5.2
WW

KW

RK1

VF1
RüF1

RK2

UP2

RüF2
VF2

RF2

UP3
RK3

VF3
UP1

RüF3
RF3

VF4

SF2
SLP

SF1
ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

EB 5578 EN

16-47

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System5.2

RK2: CO2 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4)

CO4 -> F10- 0 (DHW circulation return flow in storage tank)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)16-48− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 5.9

WW

KW

RüF1
RK1

RK2
VF1

VF2 RüF2 RK3
UP2

RF2

VF3
UP3

SLP
RF3

SF1
SF2 UP1

RüF2/
RüF4
Y4

VF4

BE17

RüF3

AF1
ZP

BE
BA
AE
AA

EB 5578 EN

16-49

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System5.9

RK2: CO2 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO1 -> F06- 1 (with SF2)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2 in RK2)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2/RüF4)

CO4 -> F04- 0 (without flow switch)

CO4 -> F14- 0 (without RüF3)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)− Control signal Y4

16-50− SLP speed

When CO1 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 6.0

RK1

VF1
RüF1

RK2
UP2

RüF2
VF2

RK3
RF2

UP3

RF1

RüF3
VF3

RF3

UP1

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

EB 5578 EN

16-51

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System6.0

RK2: CO2 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 37)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)16-52− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 6.1
WW

KW

RK1

VF1
RüF1

RF1
UP1

RK2

UP2

RüF2
VF2

RF2

RK3

VF3
UP3

RF3
RüF3

A F1

ZP
SLP

SF1

BE
BA
AE
AA

EB 5578 EN

16-53

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System6.1

RK2: CO2 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)16-54− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 7.1
WW

KW
RK1

VF2

UP1
RüF1

VF1

RK2

SF1

UP1

SLP

RüF2

ZP

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

7.1

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 0 (without AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F14- 0 (UP1 only active during the processing for an external demand)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1

16-55

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 7.2
WW

KW

RK1

VF2

UP1
RüF1

VF1

RK2

VF4

UP1
UP2

RüF2

SF2
SLP

SF1
ZP

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

7.2

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 0 (without AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4; in this case, VF2 usually installed at the point of measurement of VF4)

CO4 -> F10- 0 (DHW circulation return flow in storage tank)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F14- 0 (UP1 only active during the processing for an external demand)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)16-56− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 8.1
WW

KW

RüF1
RK1

UP1
VF1

RK2
RF1

SLP
VF2

SF1
RüF2

AF1

ZP

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

8.1

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-57

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 8.2
WW

KW

RüF1
RK1

UP1
VF1

RK2
RF1

VF4

UP2
VF2

RüF2

SF1 AF1

SF2
SLP

ZP

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

8.2

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4; in this case, VF2 usually installed at the point of measurement of VF4)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)16-58− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 9.1
WW

KW
UP1
RK1

UP1

VF1
RüF1

RK3
UP3

RüF3
VF3

RK2
RF3

SF1

VF2 RüF2
SLP

ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

EB 5578 EN

16-59

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System9.1

RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO5 -> F14- 0 (UP1 only active during the processing for an external demand)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)16-60− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 9.2
WW

KW
UP1
RK1

VF1
RüF1

RK3
UP3

RüF3
VF3

RK2
RF3

VF2

RüF2

UP2

UP1

VF4

SF2
SLP

SF1

AF1

ZP

BE
BA
AE
RK

EB 5578 EN

16-61

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System9.2

RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4; in this case, VF2 usually installed at the point of measurement of VF4)

CO4 -> F10- 0 (DHW circulation return flow in storage tank)

CO5 -> F14- 0 (UP1 only active during the processing for an external demand)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)16-62− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 9.5
WW

KW

RK1

VF1
RüF1

RK3

UP3

RüF3
VF3

RF1
RF3

UP1

RK2

VF2
SLP

RüF2

SF1
ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

EB 5578 EN

16-63

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System9.5

RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02-1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)16-64− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 9.6
WW

KW

RK1

VF1
RüF1

RK3

UP3

RüF3
VF3

RF1
RF3 UP1RK2

VF2 RüF2
UP2

VF4

SF2
SLP

SF1 AF1
ZP

BE
BA
AE
RK

EB 5578 EN

16-65

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System9.6

RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4; in this case, VF2 usually installed at the point of measurement of VF4)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)16-66− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 10.0-1

RK2
RK1

RüF1

VF1
UP1

RF1
RüF2

VF2
UP2

RF2
AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System10.0-1RK2: CO2 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 1 (with RüF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 37)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-67

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 10.0-2

RK1
UP1

RüF1
VF1

RK2
RF1

UP2

RüF2
VF2

AF1
RF2

BE
BA
AE
RK

System10.0-2RK2: CO2 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 1 (with RüF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 37)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)16-68− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 10.1-1
WW

KW

RK2
RK1

RüF1
SLP

RüF2
VF1

VF2
UP2

VF4
RF2 UP1

RF1

SF1
ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

EB 5578 EN

16-69

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System

10.1-1RK2: CO2 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 0 (without RüF1)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)16-70− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 10.1-2
WW

KW
RK1
UP1

RüF1
VF1

UP2

RF1

RK2

VF2

SF1

RF2
RüF2

SLP

VF4

ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

EB 5578 EN

16-71

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System

10.1-2RK2: CO2 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 0 (without RüF1)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)16-72− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 10.2
WW

KW

RK1
UP1

RüF1
VF1

UP2

RF1

RK2

VF2

RF2
RüF2

UP3

VF4

SF2
SLP

SF1
ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

EB 5578 EN

16-73

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System10.2

RK2: CO2 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 0 (without RüF1)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)16-74− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 10.3-1
WW

KW

RK2
RK1

RüF1
SLP

RüF2
VF1

VF2
VF4

UP2

VF3
RF2 UP1

RF1

SF3
UP3

ZP

SF1
AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

EB 5578 EN

16-75

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System

10.3-1RK2: CO2 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 0 (without RüF1)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)16-76− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 10.3-2
WW

KW

RK1
UP1

RüF1
VF1

UP2

RF1

RK2

VF2

RF2
RüF2

SLP

VF4
VF3

UP3

SF3

SF1
ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

EB 5578 EN

16-77

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System

10.3-2RK2: CO2 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 0 (without RüF1)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)16-78− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 10.5

RK2
RK1

RüF2
RüF1

VF2

UP2

VF1

UP1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

10.5

Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 0 (without AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO2 -> F02- 0 (without AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 1 (with RüF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 37)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− External demand

EB 5578 EN

When CO1 -> F18 - 1

16-79

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 11.0
WW

KW

RK2
RK1

VF1
RüF1

RüF2

SF1

RF1
ZP

UP1

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

11.0

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)16-80− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 11.1-1
WW

KW

RüF1
RK1

UP1
RK2

VF1
RüF2

VF2

SF1

RF1

SLP

ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

11.1-1

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-81

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 11.1-2
WW

KW

RK1
UP1

RüF1
VF1

RF1

VF2

SF1

RK2

SLP

RüF2

ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

11.1-2

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)16-82− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 11.1-3
WW

KW

RK2

VF2
RüF2

ZP

SF1

SLP

SF2

UP1
RK1

VF1

RüF1

AF1

RF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

11.1-3

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-83

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 11.2-1
WW

KW

RK2
RK1

VF1
RüF1

RF1
UP1

VF2
RüF2

SF2
SLP

SF1
ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

11.2-1

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F10- 0 (DHW circulation return flow in storage tank)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)16-84− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 11.2-2
WW

KW

RK2
RK1

VF1
RüF1

RF1
UP1

VF4

VF2

UP2

RüF2

SF2
SLP

SF1
ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

11.2-2

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4; in this case, VF2 usually installed at the point of measurement of VF4)

CO4 -> F10- 0 (DHW circulation return flow in storage tank)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-85

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 11.2-3
WW

KW

RK1
UP1

RüF1
VF1

RF1

VF2

RK2

UP2

SF2
RüF2

VF4

SLP

SF1
ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

16-86

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System

11.2-3

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4; in this case, VF2 usually installed at the point of measurement of VF4)

CO4 -> F10- 0 (DHW circulation return flow in storage tank)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-87

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 11.3
WW

KW

RK2
RK1

VF1
RüF1

RüF2

RF1

VF3

SF1
UP2

UP1

SF3

ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

11.3

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)

16-88− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 11.4
WW

KW

RK2
RK1

RF1

VF1
RüF1

RüF2

VF2

UP1

UP2

VF3

SF3
SLP

AF1

SF2
ZP

SF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

11.4

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F10- 0 (DHW circulation return flow in storage tank)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-89

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 11.5
WW

KW

RK2
RK1

RüF1

VF1

UP1

ZP
RüF2

SF1

AF1
RF1

BE
BA
AE
AA

System

11.5

Note:

DHW circuit with adjustable valve position for storage tankcharging in absolute priority operation. By using RüF2, theready-adjusted valve position is subject to the return flow temperature limitation.

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 1 (with RüF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)16-90− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 11.6-1
WW

KW
Z

RK2
RK1

RüF1

VF1

VF2
RüF2

SF2

SLP/ZP

UP1

SF1

AF1
RF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

11.6-1Note:

Install a continuously running pump in the DHW circuit and connect it directly to the voltage supply.

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-91

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 11.6-2
WW

KW
Z

RK2
RK1

RüF1

VF1

VF2
UP2

VF4
RüF2

SF2

SLP/ZP

UP1

SF1

AF1
RF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

11.6-2

Note:

Install a continuously running pump in the DHW circuit and connect it directly to the voltage supply.

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4; in this case, VF2 usually installed at the point of measurement of VF4)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)

16-92− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 11.9-1

WW

KW
RF1

VF1

RK2
RK1

RüF1

UP1

VF2
RüF2

SF1
BE17

ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

11.9-1

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 0 (without SF1)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F04- 0 (without flow rate sensor)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 37)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− 10 V supply

EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-93

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 11.9-2

WW

KW
RF1

VF1

RK2
RK1

RüF1

UP1

UP2

VF2
RüF2

SF1
BE17

ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

11.9-2

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 0 (without SF1)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F04- 0 (without flow rate sensor)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 37)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− 10 V supply

16-94− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 12.0
WW

KW

RK1

RüF1
RK2

UP1 RK3
VF1
UP3

ZP

RüF3
UP1
VF3
RF3

RüF2

AF1
SF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System12.0

RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 37)

CO5 -> F14- 0 (UP1 only active during the processing for an external demand)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-95

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 12.1
WW

KW

SLP

RK2
RK1

RüF1

RK3
UP1
VF1
UP3

RüF3
UP1
VF3
RF3

RüF2
VF2

ZP

SF1
AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System12.1

RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO5 -> F14- 0 (UP1 only active during the processing for an external demand)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)

16-96− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 12.2-1
WW

KW

RK2
RK1

RüF1

UP1 RK3
VF1 UP3

RüF3 UP1
VF3
RF3

RüF2

SLP
VF2

ZP
SF2
SF1

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

EB 5578 EN

16-97

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System

12.2-1RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F10- 0 (DHW circulation return flow in storage tank)

CO5 -> F14- 0 (UP1 only active during the processing for an external demand)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)

16-98− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 12.2-2
WW

KW

RK2
RK1

RüF1

UP2 UP1 RK3
VF1 UP3

RüF3 UP1
VF3
RF3

RüF2
VF2

SLP
VF4

ZP
SF2
SF1

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

EB 5578 EN

16-99

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System

12.2-2RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4; in this case, VF2 usually installed at the point of measurement of VF4)

CO4 -> F10- 0 (DHW circulation return flow in storage tank)

CO5 -> F14- 0 (UP1 only active during the processing for an external demand)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)16-100− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 12.9-1

WWKW

UP1 RK3

RK2
RK1

RüF1

VF1 UP3

RüF3
VF3

UP1

RF3

VF2
RüF2

AF1

SF1
BE17

ZP

BE
BA
AE
RK

EB 5578 EN

16-101

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System

12.9-1RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 0 (without SF1)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F04- 0 (without flow rate sensor)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 37)

CO5 -> F14- 0 (UP1 only active during the processing for an external demand)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)− 10 V supply

16-102− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 12.9-2

WW

KW

RK2
RK1

UP2 UP1 RK3
RüF1

VF1 UP3

RüF3
VF3

UP1

RF3

VF2
RüF2

BE17

AF1

SF1
ZP

BE
BA
AE
RK

EB 5578 EN

16-103

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System

12.9-2RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 0 (without SF1)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F04- 0 (without flow rate sensor)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 37)

CO5 -> F14- 0 (UP1 only active during the processing for an external demand)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)− 10 V supply

16-104− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 13.0
WW

KW

RK2
RK1

RüF1

VF1 RK3
UP3

RüF3
VF3

SF1

RüF2
RF3

UP1

RF1

ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System13.0

RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 37)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-105

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 13.1
WW

KW

RK2
RK1

RüF1

VF1 RK3
SLP UP3

RüF3
VF3

VF2
RF3

UP1

SF1

RüF2
RF1

ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

16-106

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System13.1

RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-107

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 13.2-1
WW

KW

RK2
RK1

RüF1

VF1 RK3
UP3

RüF3
VF3

RF3

RüF2
UP1

RF1

SLP
VF2

ZP
SF2

AF1
SF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

16-108EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System

13.2-1RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F04- 0 (without flow rate sensor)

CO4 -> F10- 0 (DHW circulation return flow in storage tank)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-109Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 13.2-2
WW

KW

RK2
RK1

RüF1

VF1 RK3
UP2 UP3

RüF3
VF3

RF3

VF2
UP1

RüF2
RF1

SLP
VF4

ZP
SF2

AF1
SF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

16-110EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System

13.2-2RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F04- 0 (without flow rate sensor)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4; in this case, VF2 usually installed at the point of measurement of VF4)

CO4 -> F10- 0 (DHW circulation return flow in storage tank)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-111

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 13.6-1
WW

KW
Z

RK2
RK1

VF1
RüF1

VF2
RüF2

SF2
SLP/ZP

SF1

UP1

UP3
RF1 RK3

VF3

RF3
RüF3

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

16-112EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System

13.6-1RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Note:

Install a continuously running pump in the DHW circuit and connect it directly to the voltage supply.

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-113

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 13.6-2
WW

KW
Z

RK2
RK1

RüF1

VF1

VF2
UP2

VF4
RüF2

SF2
SLP/ZP

SF1

UP1

UP3
RF1 RK3

VF3

RF3
RüF3

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

16-114

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System

13.6-2RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Note:

Install a continuously running pump in the DHW circuit and connect it directly to the voltage supply.

Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4; in this case, VF2 usually installed at the point of measurement of VF4)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-115

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 13.9-1

WW

KW
RK2
RK1

VF1 RK3
RüF1

UP3

RüF3
VF3
RF3

UP1

RF1

VF2
RüF2

SF1
BE17

AF1
ZP

BE
BA
AE
RK

16-116

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System

13.9-1RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 0 (without SF1)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F04- 0 (without flow rate sensor)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 37)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)− 10 V supply

EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-117

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 13.9-2

WW

KW
RK2
RK1

VF1 RK3
RüF1 UP2 UP3

RüF3
VF3
RF3

UP1

RF1

VF2
RüF2

SF1
BE17

AF1
ZP

BE
BA
AE
RK

16-118EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System

13.9-2RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 0 (without SF1)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F04- 0 (without flow rate sensor)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 37)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)− 10 V supply

EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-119Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 14.1

WW

KW

RüF1
RK1

BA8 BA9SF1

VF1 SLP

ZP

VF2
UP2

UP1
SF3

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

14.1

Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)

16-120− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 14.2

WW

RüF1
RK1

BA8 BA9SLP

VF1 UP1

SF2

SF1
ZP

VF2
UP2

SF3

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

14.2

Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-121

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 14.3
WW

KW

RüF1
RK1

BA8 BA9
VF1 SLP

SF1

UP2

ZP

SF3

RüF2 SF4/VF4

UP1

SF2

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

14.3

Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO4 -> F01- 0 (without RüF1)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)

16-122− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 15.0
WW

KW

RüF3
RK1

VF1 SF3
RüF1

UP1 SF4/VF4

RK3

VF3
UP3

UP2
RF3

SF2
SLP

SF1
ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

EB 5578 EN

16-123

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System15.0

RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)

16-124− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 15.1

WW

KW

RÜF1
RK1

BA8 BA9VF4
VF1 SLP

ZP

UP2
SF1

VF2

SF3

UP1
RK3

UP3

RüF3
UP1
RF3
AF1

VF3

BE
BA
AE
RK

EB 5578 EN

16-125

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System15.1

RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO5 -> F14- 0 (UP1 only active during the processing for an external demand)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)

16-126− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 15.2

WW

KW

RÜF1
RK1

BA8 BA9
VF1 UP1

SLP

ZP
SF2

UP2

SF1

VF2

SF3

UP3
RK3

RüF3
AF1
RF3

VF3

BE
BA
AE
RK

EB 5578 EN

16-127

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System15.2

RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)

16-128− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 15.3
WW

KW

RüF1
RK1

BA8 BA9
VF1 SLP

SF1
SF3

ZP

UP2
UP1

RüF2 SF4/VF4
SF2

RK3

UP3 RüF3
RF3
VF3

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

EB 5578 EN

16-129Annex A (configuration instructions)

System15.3

RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)

16-130− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 15.4

WW

KW

RüF1
RK1

UP1
VF1

SLP

ZP

SF1 SF4/VF4
SF3

RK3

UP3 RüF3
RF3
VF3

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

EB 5578 EN

16-131

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System15.4

RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)

16-132− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 15.5

WW

KW

SF4/VF4
RüF1
RK1

UP1
VF1 UP2SLP

SF2 SF1
SF3
ZP

AF1

UP3 RüF3
RK3

VF3

RF3

BE
BA
AE
RK

EB 5578 EN

16-133

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System15.5

RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)

16-134− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 16.0

RK1

VF1
RüF1

SF2
SLP

UP1

AF1

SF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

16.0

Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO1 -> F06- 1 (with SF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)EB 5578 EN− SLP speed

When CO1 -> F21 - 1− Differential temperature control

When CO1 -> F23 - 1− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-135

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 16.1

UP1

RK1

VF1
RüF1

SF2
SLP

UP2
SF1

RK2

VF2

UP1 AF1

RüF2
RF2

BE
BA
AE
RK

16-136

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System16.1

RK2: CO2 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO1 -> F06- 1 (with SF2)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 38)

CO5 -> F14- 0 (UP1 according to the ZP schedule or only active during the processing
for an external demand)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)EB 5578 EN− SLP speed

When CO1 -> F21 - 1− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-137

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 16.2

RK1

VF1
RüF1

SF2

VF2
UP2

SLP

UP1

AF1

SF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

16.2

Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO1 -> F06- 1 (with SF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)

16-138− SLP speed

When CO1 -> F21 - 1− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 16.3

RK1

VF1
RüF1

SLP

RüF2

SF3

AF1

SF1

SF2

BA9

UP1

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

16.3

Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO1 -> F06- 1 (with SF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)EB 5578 EN− SLP speed

When CO1 -> F21 - 1− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-139Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 16.4

RK1

VF1
RüF1

SLP

RüF2

VF2

BA9

SF3
UP2

SF1

UP1

AF1

SF2

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

16.4

Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO1 -> F06- 1 (with SF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)

16-140− SLP speed

When CO1 -> F21 - 1− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 16.8

UP1

RK1

VF1
RüF1

SLP

SF2

VF2
UP2

SF1

UP3
RK3

VF3

RüF3

UP1

RF3

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

EB 5578 EN

16-141

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System16.5

RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO1 -> F06- 1 (with SF2)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 38)

CO5 -> F14- 0 (UP1 according to the ZP schedule or only active during the processing
for an external demand)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)

16-142− SLP speed

When CO1 -> F21 - 1− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 16.6

RK1

VF1
RüF1

SLP

RüF2

SF3 SF1

UP1

SF2

AF1

UP2
RK2

VF2

RF2

BE
BA
AE
RK

System16.6

RK2: CO2 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO1 -> F06- 1 (with SF2)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 38)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)EB 5578 EN− SLP speed

When CO1 -> F21 - 1− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-143

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 16.7

UP1

RK1

VF1
RüF1

SLP

RüF2
BA9

VF2

SF3 SF1
UP2

SF2

RK3

VF3
UP3

RF3
RüF3

UP1 AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

16-144

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System16.7

RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO1 -> F06- 1 (with SF2)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 43)

CO5 -> F14- 0 (UP1 according to the ZP schedule or only active during the processing
for an external demand)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)EB 5578 EN− SLP speed

When CO1 -> F21 - 1− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-145

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 16.8

UP1

RK1

VF1
RüF1

SLP/0...10V

SF2

UP2
SF1

RK2

RüF2 RK3
VF2

RF2

VF3
UP3

RF3

RüF3

UP1 AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

16-146

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System16.8

RK2: CO2 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO1 -> F06- 1 (with SF2)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 38)

CO5 -> F14- 0 (UP1 according to the ZP schedule or only active during the processing
for an external demand)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)EB 5578 EN− SLP speed

When CO1 -> F21 - 1− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-147

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 17.1

Electric
heating
E-Heizung

WW

KW

RüF1
RK1

SLP
VF1

SF1
SF2

UP1

RüF2 RK2
RüF2
RüF4
BA10 UP2Y4

VF4 RF2
VF2

BE17
RüF3

AF1
ZP

BE
BA
AE
AA

16-148EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System17.1

RK2: CO2 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO1 -> F06- 1 (with SF2)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2 in RK2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2/RüF4)

CO4 -> F04- 0 (without flow switch)

CO4 -> F14- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y4

EB 5578 EN− SLP speed

When CO1 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-149Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 17.8

WW

KW

RüF1
RK1

SLP
VF1

SF1
SF2

UP1

RüF2/ RK2 RüF2
RüF4
UP2

Y4

VF4 RF2 RK3
VF2 UP3

BE17
RüF3

VF3
ZP

AF1

RF3

BE
BA
AE
AA

16-150EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System17.8

RK2: CO2 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO1 -> F06- 1 (with SF2)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2 in RK2)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2/RüF4)

CO4 -> F04- 0 (without flow switch)

CO4 -> F14- 0 (without RüF3)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)− Control signal Y4

EB 5578 EN− SLP speed

When CO1 -> F21 - 1− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-151

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 18.1-1
Electric
heating

WW

KW

F

RK1

RüF2
RK2

VF2

RüF1
UP2

RF2
VF1

SF2
SLP

UP1

SF1

BA10

RüF2
RüF4

Y4

VF4

BE17

RüF3

AF1
ZP

BE
BA
AE
AA

16-152EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System18.1-1RK2: CO2 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO1 -> F06- 1 (with SF2)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 1 (with RüF2 in RK2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2/RüF4)

CO4 -> F04- 0 (without flow switch)

CO4 -> F14- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y4

EB 5578 EN− SLP speed

When CO1 -> F21 - 1− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-153

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 18.1-2
Electric
heating
E-Heizung

WW

KW

F

UP2
RK2

RüF2
VF2

VF1

RF2

RK1

SLP

SF2
RüF1

UP1

SF1

BA10
RüF2/
Y4
RüF4

VF4

BE 17
RüF3

AF1
ZP

BE
BA
AE
AA

16-154

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System18.1-2

Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO1 -> F06- 1 (with SF2)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 1 (with RüF2 in RK2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2/RüF4)

CO4 -> F04- 0 (without flow switch)

CO4 -> F14- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 46)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y4

EB 5578 EN− SLP speed

When CO1 -> F21 - 1− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-155

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 21.0

WW

KW

RK2
RK3

RK1

RüF1 UP1
VF1

VF2
RF1
UP3
RF3
VF3 RüF2
RüF3

SF1
ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

16-156

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System21.0

RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 1 (with RüF3)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 37)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-157

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 21.1-1

WW

KW

RK2
RK3

RK1

RüF1 UP1
VF1

VF2
RF1
UP3
RF3
VF3 RüF2
RüF3
SLP

SF1
ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

16-158EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System

21.1-1RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 0 (without RüF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-159Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 21.1-2
WW

KW

UP1

VF1
RK1

RF1
RüF1

RK3
UP3

RüF3
VF3

RF3

VF2

SF1

SLP

RK2

RüF2

ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

16-160EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System

21.1-2RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 0 (without RüF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 0 (without RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 0 (without SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-161

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 21.2-1

WW

KW

RK3

RK1
RK2

VF1
RüF1

UP1

RF1
RüF3

VF2

UP3
VF3

RF3

RüF2

SF2
SLP

SF1

ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

16-162EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System

21.2-1RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 1 (with RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F10- 0 (DHW circulation return flow in storage tank)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-163

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 21.2-2

WW

KW

RK3

RK1
RK2

VF1
RüF1

RF1

UP1 UP2 RüF3

VF2

UP3
VF3

RF3

VF4
RüF2

SF2
SLP

SF1

ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

16-164

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System

21.2-2RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 1 (with RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4; in this case, VF2 usually installed at the point of measurement of VF4)

CO4 -> F10- 0 (DHW circulation return flow in storage tank)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK3)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-165

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 21.2-3
WW

KW

UP1

VF1
RK1

RK3

RF1
RüF1

UP3

RüF3 UP2VF3

RF3 RK2

VF4

VF2
RüF2

SF1

SF2
SLP

ZP

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

16-166

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System

21.2-3RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 1 (with RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 1 (with SF1)

CO4 -> F02- 1 (with SF2)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F05- 0 (without VF4; in this case, VF2 usually installed at the point of measurement of VF4)

CO4 -> F10- 0 (DHW circulation return flow in storage tank)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− SLP speed

When CO4 -> F21 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-167

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 21.9-1

WW

KW

RüF1

RK2
RK3

RK1

UP1
VF1

RF1
RüF3

UP3
VF3

RF3
RüF2

VF2

SF1
BE17

AF1
ZP

BE
BA
AE
RK

16-168EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System

21.9-1RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 1 (with RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 0 (without SF1)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F04- 0 (without flow rate sensor)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 37)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)− 10 V supply

EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-169Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 21.9-2

WW

KW

RüF1

RK2
RK3

RK1

UP1
VF1

RF1
RüF3

UP2

UP3

VF3

RF3
RüF2

VF2

SF1
BE17

AF1
ZP

BE
BA
AE
RK

16-170EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System

21.9-2RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 1 (with RüF3)

CO4 -> F01- 0 (without SF1)

CO4 -> F03- 0 (without RüF2)

CO4 -> F04- 0 (without flow rate sensor)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 37)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)− 10 V supply

EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− ZP speed

When CO4 -> F25 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-171

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 25.0-1

RK2
RK1

RK3
RüF1

VF1
UP1

RF1
RüF2

VF2
UP2

RF2
RüF3

VF3 UP3

RF3

AF1

BE
BA
AE
RK

16-172EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System25.0-1RK2: CO2 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 1 (with RüF2)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 1 (with RüF3)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 37)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-173

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 25.0-2

RK1
UP1

RüF1
VF1

RK2
RF1

UP2

RK3

RüF2
VF2

RF2

UP3

RüF3
VF3

AF1
RF3

BE
BA
AE
RK

16-174

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System25.0-2RK2: CO2 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO2 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
RK3: CO3 -> F02 - 0 = Fixed set point control; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF1 = Outdoor-temperature-compensatedcontrol with AF1; CO3 -> F02 - 1, select AF2 = Outdoor-temperature-compensated control with AF2
Default setting
CO1 -> F01- 0 (without RF1)

CO1 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO2 -> F01- 0 (without RF2)

CO2 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 1 (with RüF2)

CO3 -> F01- 0 (without RF3)

CO3 -> F02- 1 (with AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 1 (with RüF3)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 37)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)EB 5578 EN− External demand

When CO1 -> F18 - 1− Outdoor temperature

When CO5 -> F23 - 1
Direction = Output

16-175

Annex A (configuration instructions)

System Anl 25.5

RüF1
RK1

VF2

RK2
VF1

RüF2

UP1

UP3

RüF3
RK3

VF3

UP2

BE
BA
AE
RK

System

25.5

Default setting
CO1 -> F02- 0 (without AF1)

CO1 -> F03- 1 (with RüF1)

CO2 -> F02- 0 (without AF1)

CO2 -> F03- 1 (with RüF2)

CO3 -> F02- 0 (without AF1)

CO3 -> F03- 1 (with RüF3)

CO5 -> F07- 0 (without error message at terminal 37)

CO5 -> F34, F35

Function AA1 (0 to 10 V), AA2 (PWM):− Control signal Y1 (RK1)− Control signal Y2 (RK2)− Control signal Y3 (RK3)− External demand

16-176

When CO1 -> F18 - 1

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)16.2 Functions of the heating circuit
Which controller functions are available depends on the selected system code number (Anl).

16.2.1 Outdoor-temperature-compensated control
When outdoor-temperature-compensated control is used, the flow temperature is controlled
based on the outdoor temperature. The heating characteristic in the controller defines theflow temperature set point as a function of the outdoor temperature (see Fig. 16-2). The outdoor temperature required for outdoor-temperature-compensated control can either be measured at an outdoor sensor, received over the 0 to 10 V input (see section 16.2.1.1) or aconnected device bus (see section 16.2.1.2).

tVL [° C]

3.2

150

2.9

2.6

2.4

140

2.2

130

2.0

120

1.8

110

1.6

100

1.4

90

1.2

80

1.0

70

0.8

60

0.6

50

0.4

40

0.2

30
20
20 16 12 8tVLtA

Flow temperature
Outdoor temperature

tA
4

0

–4 –8 –12 –16 –20 –24 –28 –32 –36 –40 [° C]

Fig. 16-2: Gradient characteristics

EB 5578 EN

16-177

Annex A (configuration instructions)16.2.1.1 Outdoor temperature received or sent as 0 to 10 V
signalThe outdoor temperature can be received at terminals 19 and 23 over the 0 to 10 V input.
Alternatively, the temperature measured by the outdoor sensor can be issued at AA1 as a 0
to 10 V signal. The zero of the 0 to 10 V input and output signals can be shifted, if required.
FunctionsOutdoor sensor AF1, 2
Outdoor temperature received
or sent as 0 to 10 V signal

Default
1

CO1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> F02 - 1
CO2, 3: select AF1, AF2

0

CO5 -> F23 - 1

Input–20 °C
50 °C

AI1 Zero shift
Outdoor temperature received
or sent as 0 to 10 V signal

Direction: input (receive)
Lower transmission range: –50 to +100 °C
Upper transmission range: –50 to +100 °C

05%

CO5 -> F31 - 1
Zero: 5 to 20 %0

CO5 -> F23 - 1

Input

Direction: output (send)–20 °C

Lower transmission range: –50 to +100 °C

50 °C

Upper transmission range: –50 to +100 °C

AA1 reverse

00%

AA1 PWM

016-178Configuration

CO5 -> F25 - 0
Zero: 0 to 50 %CO5 -> F34 - 0
Function: outdoor temperature

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)16.2.1.2 Outdoor temperature received or sent over the devicebus
The measured outdoor temperature can be provided to other controllers over the device bus.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

0

CO7 -> F01 - 1, device bus address

0

CO7 -> F07 - 1, register number

CO1, 2, 3 -> F02 - 1

Outdoor sensor AF1, 2
Device bus
Receive value AF1
1)

0

CO7 -> F06 - 1, register number

Receive value AF20

CO7 -> F09 - 1, register number

Send value AF2 1)

0

CO7 -> F08 - 1, register number

Send value AF1

1)

Send received outdoor temperature as 0 to 10 V signal by device bus with CO5 -> F23 - 1 settingand AEEB 5578 EN

16-179Annex A (configuration instructions)16.2.1.3 Gradient characteristic
Basically, the following rule applies: a decrease in the outdoor temperature causes the flow
temperature to increase in order to keep the room temperature constant. By varying the 'Gradient' and 'Level' parameters, you can adapt the characteristic to your individual requirements:

tVL

The gradient needs to be increased if the room temperaturedrops when it is cold outside.

°C

tA
+20

tVL

0

–20 °C°C

The gradient needs to be decreased if the room temperaturedrops when it is cold outside.

tA
+20

tVL

0

–20 °C°C

The level needs to be increased and the gradient decreased
if the room temperature drops when it is mild outside.

tA
+20

tVL

0

–20 °C°C

The level needs to be decreased and the gradient increased
if the room temperature rises when it is mild outside.

tA+20

16-1800–20 °CEB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

Outside the times-of-use, reduced set points are used for control: the reduced flow set point iscalculated as the difference between the adjusted values for 'Day set point' (rated room temperature) and 'Night set point' (reduced room temperature). The 'Max. flow temperature' and'Min. flow temperature' parameters mark the upper and lower limits of the flow temperature.
A separate gradient characteristic can be selected for the limitation of the return flow temperature.
Examples for adjusting the characteristic:− Old building, radiator design 90/70:

Gradient approx. 1.8− New building, radiator design 70/55:

Gradient approx. 1.4− New building, radiator design 55/45:

Gradient approx. 1.0− Underfloor heating depending on arrangement:

Gradient smaller than 0.5

Note
Particularly for control operation without room sensor, the room temperatures set for day('Day set point') and night ('Night set point') only become effective satisfactorily when theheating characteristic has been adapted to the building/heating surface layout.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Four-point characteristic0CO1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> F11 - 1

Parameters

Default

Switch position: value range

Day set point

20.0 °C: 0.0 to 40.0 °C

Night set point15.0 °C: 0.0 to 40.0 °C

Parameters

Default

Parameters: value range

Flow gradient1.2

PA1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> P01: 0.2 to 3.2

1)

Level (parallel shift)

0.0 °C

Min. flow temperature

20.0 °C

Max. flow temperature

70.0 °C

1)

With
CO1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> F05 - 1
the following applies:

EB 5578 EN

PA1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> P02: –30.0 to 30.0 °C
PA1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> P06: –5.0 to 150.0 °C
1)PA1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> P07: 5.0 to 150.0 °C

Gradient: 0.2 to 1.0 (0.5)
Max. flow temperature: 5.0 to 50.0 °C (50.0 °C)

16-181

Annex A (configuration instructions)16.2.1.4 Four-point characteristic
The four-point characteristic allows you to define your own heating characteristic. It is defined by four points for the outdoor temperature, flow temperature, reduced flow temperatureand return flow temperature. The 'Max. flow temperature' and 'Min. flow temperature' parameters mark the upper and lower limits of the flow temperature.

tVL

°C

100

tVLmax 90
80
70
60

P2

50
40
30

P1 to P4 Points 1 to 4tVL
Flow temperaturetA
Outdoor temperature- - - min Min. flow temperature- - - max Max. flow temperature––––––––– Four-point characteristic–  –  –  –  –  –   Reduced four-point
characteristic

P1

P3
P4

tVLmin 20
10+20 +15 +10

tA
+5

0

–5

–10

–15 –20°C

Fig. 16-3: Four-point characteristic

Note− The 'Day set point' and 'Night set point' parameters are no longer available when the fourpoint characteristic has been selected when no additional functions (e.g. optimization,
flash adaptation) have been selected.
− The four-point characteristic function can only be activated when the adaptation function
is not active (CO1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> F08 - 0).
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Adaptation

0

CO1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> F08 - 0

Four-point characteristic0CO1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> F11 - 1

16-182EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)Parameters
Outdoor temperature

Flow temperature

Reduced flow temperature

Return flow temperature

Default

Parameters: value range

Point 1–15.0 °C

Point 2–5.0 °C

PA1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> P05:
–50.0 to +50.0 °C

Point 35.0 °C

Point 415.0 °C

Point 170.0 °C

Point 255.0 °C

Point 340.0 °C

Point 425.0 °C

Point 160.0 °C

Point 240.0 °C

Point 320.0 °C

Point 420.0 °C

Points 1 to 4 65.0 °C

PA1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> P05:
–5.0 to +150.0 °C

PA1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> P05:
–5.0 to +150.0 °C

PA1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> P05: 5.0 to 90.0 °C
PA1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> P06:
–5.0 to +150.0 °C

Min. flow temperature

20.0 °C

Max. flow temperature

70.0 °C 1) PA1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> P07: 5.0 to 150.0 °C

1)With CO1, 2, 3, 11, 12,
13 -> F05 - 1 the following applies:

Max. flow temperature: 5.0 to 50.0 °C (50.0 °C)

16.2.2 Fixed set point control
During the times-of-use, the flow temperature can be controlled according to a fixed set
point. Outside the times-of-use, the controller regulates to a reduced flow temperature. Set
the desired rated flow temperature as 'Day set point' and the reduced flow temperature as'Night set point'.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Outdoor sensor

1

CO1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> F02 - 0

Parameters

Default

Switch position: value range

Day set point

50.0 °C: Min. to max. flow temperatureNight set point

30.0 °C: Min. to max. flow temperature

EB 5578 EN

16-183

Annex A (configuration instructions)Parameters

Default

Parameters: value range

Min. flow temperature

20.0 °C

PA1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> P06:
–5.0 to +150.0 °C

Max. flow temperature

70.0 °C

PA1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> P07:
5.0 to 150.0 °C

16.2.3 Underfloor heating/drying of jointless floors
Using function block setting CO1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> F05 - 1, the respective heating circuit
is configured as an underfloor heating circuit. In doing so, the controller at first only limits thevalue ranges of the heating characteristic gradient and the maximum flow temperature in
PA1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 parameter levels:− Value range of the gradient: 0.2 to 1.0− Value range of the maximum flow temperature: 5 to 50 °C
Furthermore, it is possible to set a Boost between 0.0 to 50.0 °C, which is additionally taken
into account when there is a heat demand for the underfloor heating circuit of an upstream
control circuit.
The Drying of jointless floors function can be activated afterwards. The function block parameters (starting with the 'Start temperature') determine the drying process: the first heating
up phase starts at the entered 'Start temperature', which has a flow temperature of 25 °C in
its default setting. The start temperature is constantly regulated for the days entered in 'Hold(days)'. Afterwards, this temperature is raised by the value entered in 'Temp. rise/day' within
24 hours, i.e. the default setting causes the flow temperature set point to rise to 30 °C 24
hours after the holding phase. If the maximum temperature is reached, it is kept constant for
the number of days entered in 'Hold (days)'. The 'Temp. reduction/day' parameter determines the temperature reduction downwards. If the 'Temp. reduction/day' is set to 0, the temperature maintaining phase moves directly to automatic mode. If the function block parameter 'Start temperature' is set to 25 °C and 'Temp. rise/day' to 0.0 °C, the drying functions
runs as specified in Part 4 of DIN EN 1264: the drying of jointless floors function starts witha flow temperature of 25 °C, which is kept constant for three days. Afterwards, the controller
switches to the maximum adjusted temperature. The further process remains unchanged. The
drying of jointless floors function is activated using the adjusted 'Start temperature' bychanging the setting 'Stop' to 'Start'. 'Start' is displayed when the drying function starts. The
restarting stages 'Build-up', 'Hold' (holding the maximum temperature) and 'Reduction' canbe be selected to continue an interrupted drying process. The course of the drying process
can be monitored in the operating level by reading the measured data of the associatedheating circuit.

16-184

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)'Done' is displayed after the last phase is completed. This disappears from the display after
resetting the display to Stop in CO1, 2, 3 -> F05 or after interrupting the power supply. If a
power failure occurs while the drying process is in progress, the drying process continues afterwards exactly at the point at which it was interrupted. In systems in which the drying function is interrupted due to DHW heating (e.g. system Anl 2.1), storage tank charging does notoccur while the drying function is active, provided it is not used for frost protection of thestorage tank.

Note
The function block parameter can only be accessed after starting the function by resetting to'Stop' in CO1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> F05.
Functions
Underfloor heating/drying of jointless
floorsDefault
00.0 °C
25.0 °C
05.0 °C45.0 °C
4
0.0 °C
Stop

Configuration
CO1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> F05 - 1
Boost: 0.0 to 50.0 °C
Start temperature: 20.0 to 60.0 °C
Hold (days): 0 to 10 days
Temp. rise/day: 0.0 to 20.0 °C
Maximum temperature: 25.0 to 60.0 °C
Hold (days): 0 to 30 days
Temp. reduction/day: 0.0 to 20.0 °C
Start condition: Stop, Start, Raise, Hold, Reduction

16.2.4 Night set-back
The night set-back (= difference of the flow target temperature in day and night mode) is calculated in all heating circuits with a gradient characteristic as follows:
2x Heating characteristic gradient x (day room temperature – night room temperature)

EB 5578 EN

16-185

Annex A (configuration instructions)16.2.4.1 Outdoor temperature for continuous day mode
If a heating circuit is in night mode (automatic mode, ), this circuit is switched to day mode
whenever the outdoor temperature falls below 'Outdoor temperature for continuous day
mode'. The night mode restarts after the outdoor temperature rises above the limit (plus
0.5 °C hysteresis).
This function prevents the building from cooling down excessively outside the times-of-use
when low outdoor temperatures occur. The transition towards day mode can be configured to
be variable depending on the outdoor temperature.
Parameters

Default

Parameters: value range

Outdoor temperature for continuous
day mode–15.0 °C

PA1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> P09: –50.0 to 5.0 °C(only when CO1, CO2, CO3, CO11, CO12,
CO13 -> F28 - 0)

16.2.4.2 Variable night set-backWith the setting CO1, CO2, CO3, CO11, CO12, CO13 -> F28 - 1, the night set-back isvariable based on the outdoor temperature. The night set-back is fully effective at outdoor
temperatures above the outdoor temperature limit value 'OTL night 100 %'.
The absolute value of the night set-back is linearly reduced to zero in the range between thisvalue and the outdoor temperature limit value 'OTL night 0 %' for continuous day mode.
The absolute value of the night set-back is indicated in the 'Night set points' menu as 'HKx
night set-back'. It is also indicated during day mode, but has no effect. With the setting CO1,
CO2,CO3, CO11, CO12, CO13 -> F28 - 1, the 'Outdoor temperature for continuous day
mode' (P09) parameter is not used in the corresponding PA level.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Variable night set-back

0

CO1, CO2, CO3, CO11, CO12,
CO13 -> F28 - 1(only when CO1, CO2, CO3, CO11,
CO12, CO13 -> F11 - 0)

16-186

5.0 °COTL night 100 %: –50 °C to 20.0 °C–15 °COTL day 0 %: –50 °C to 5.0 °C

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)16.2.5 Buffer tank systems
A heating characteristic based on a gradient or four entered points can be set in PA1 for the
buffer tanks in systems Anl 3.9, 5.9, 14.1 to 14.3, 15.1 to 15.5, 16.x, 17.x and 18.x. A
buffer tank set point for day operation and a buffer tank set point for night operation can be
set without outdoor sensors in the customer level. An external demand transmitted from secondary controlled heating circuits, DHW circuit or an external request (by device bus, 0 to
10 V or binary signal) can override the current buffer tank set point. The maximum demandis indicated as the buffer tank set point for SF1. If the temperature falls below the buffer tankset point at SF1, charging of the buffer tank is started. This does not apply to systems
Anl 3.9, 5.9 and 18.x. In these systems, the buffer tank set point is only determined by the
DHW circuit.
In systems Anl 14.1 to 14.3 and 15.1 to 15.5, the set point of the charging temperature isalways 6 °C higher than the buffer tank set point. Each charging of the buffer tank finishes
as soon as the temperature at the top buffer tank sensor is +3 °C higher than the buffer tankset point (bottom buffer tank sensor in systems Anl 15.4 and 15.5). If charging of the DHW
storage tank is demanded in systems Anl 14.1 to 14.3 and 15.1 to 15.3, it is first checked
whether there is enough heat in the buffer tank to charge the DHW storage tank. The DHW
storage tank is charged by the district heating system if the temperature in the buffer tank isinsufficient for charging. The charging of the DHW storage tank has priority over a charging
demand of the buffer tank. The buffer tank is charged once the DHW storage tank charging
has been completed. In systems Anl 14.3 and 15.3, a solar circuit with reroutable heatexchanger flow is integrated.  If the temperature difference between the collector circuit
sensor RüF2 and one of the storage tank sensors SF3 or SF4 is greater than the value of'Solar circuit pump ON', the solar circuit pump UP2 is activated and the corresponding
storage tank is charged. If both storage tanks can be charged, the DHW storage tankcharging has priority. If the temperature difference falls below the value of 'Solar circuit
pump OFF' in both storage tank circuits, the solar circuit pump UP2 is deactivated again.
Basically, the solar circuit pump is deactivated when the measured temperatures of bothstorage tank sensors SF3 and SF4 have reached the 'Max. storage tank temperature' or'Maximum buffer tank temperature' or when the solar collector temperature rises above
120 °C.
In systems Anl 3.9, 5.9, 16.x, 17.x and 18.x, the set point of the charging temperature is determined by the 'Minimum set point to charge buffer tank' parameter setting in the PA1 level.
The automatic adaptation ('AUTO' setting) causes the set point of the charging temperature
to always be above the current buffer tank set point by the value entered in 'Charging temperature boost'. Every other value entered in 'Minimum set point to charge buffer tank' isused as the minimum set point for the charging temperature which first starts to be variable

EB 5578 EN

16-187

Annex A (configuration instructions)at higher buffer tank set points. When a return flow temperature sensor RüF1 is used, thecharging pump SLP (CO1 -> F22 - 1) is first released to avoid cold charging when the temperature measured at RüF1 has reached the same temperature measured at SF1.
In systems Anl 3.9 and 5.9 this function only applies when the heating circuits RK2 and RK3
are not running. The 'Stop charging of the buffer tank' parameter (PA1 -> P17, default = AUTO) determines under which conditions the charging of the buffer tank is stopped. The automatic adaptation ('AUTO' setting) causes the buffer tank charging to be stopped when thetemperature in the buffer tank reaches the value ('Buffer tank set point' + 'Hysteresis of buffer
tank'. Every other value entered for 'Stop charging of the buffer tank' is rated as a fixedswitch-off temperature for the buffer tank charging. When SF2 (CO1 -> F06 - 1) is configured, SF2 is always used to stop the charging of the buffer tank. The CO1 -> F25 - 1 setting
causes the buffer tank bottom sensor SF3 to be activated, which can be used to stop buffertank charging at low outdoor temperatures. In this way, the buffer tank is not completely
charged in summer mode with SF2 as a switch-off sensor to keep the return flow temperature
low at the end of the buffer tank charging. The storage tank charging pump is not switched
off until the lag time (entered 'Valve transit time Ty' for RK1 multiplied by 'Lag time ofcharging pump') has elapsed. An activated setting CO1 -> F27 - 1 (discharging protection)
causes the charging to be stopped when the charging temperature does not reach its set
point even though the valve is fully open or it falls below the temperature measured at SF1and does not rise again. Charging with the valve fully open is stopped after one hour at thelatest. In such cases, 'Operation: discharging protection' is displayed with the measured values in HC1 for the next 30 minutes.
The CO1 -> F27 - 1 setting causes a 2 °C higher charging set point to be calculated. The following then applies:
Charging set point = Set point at SF1 + 'Charging temperature boost' + 2 °C
The operation of the feeder pump UP1 in systems Anl 16.0 to 16.5, 16.7 and 16.8 is either
determined by the ZP time schedule or prompted by an external demand. For systems withdownstream control circuits, either only this external demand or the demand of the downstream control circuits causes the feeder pump UP1 to be activated, depending on theCO5 -> F14 setting.
The pump UP2 of the solid fuel boiler circuit in systems Anl 14.1, 14.2, 15.1, 15.2, 16.2,
16.4, 16.5 and 16.7 starts to run when the temperature reaches 'Start temperature for boiler
pump' at VF2. The boiler pump is switched off again when the temperature at VF2 falls below the temperature T = 'Start temperature for boiler pump' – 'Boiler pump hysteresis'.
In systems Anl 14.3, 15.3, 16.3, 16.4, 16.6 and 16.7, a solar circuit is integrated, whichuses storage tank sensor SF3 for control. The collector circuit pump CP is activated when thetemperature at the collector sensor RüF2 is higher than that at storage tank sensor SF3 by the

16-188EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)value entered in 'Solar circuit pump ON'. It is deactivated when the temperature difference
falls below the valve entered in 'Solar circuit pump OFF', when the temperature at the storage tank sensor SF3 reaches 'Max. storage tank temperature' or when the collector temperature rises above 120 °C.
The outputs AA1 (0 to 10 V) and AA2 (PWM) for the control signal Y4 to control the heatexchanger charging pump are available to control the DHW temperature in systems Anl 3.9,
5.9, 17.x and 18.x. The control signal can also be reversed, if required. For operation of theheat exchanger charging pump, the minimum delivery rate and the control parameters tocontrol the DHW temperature can adjusted with CO4 -> F12 - 1.  The outputs AA1 (0 to
10 V) and AA2 (PWM) are available for adapting the delivery rate of the charging pump
SLP based on the temperature. The output signal can also be reversed, if required. A flow
switch can be activated with the CO4 -> F04 - 1 setting. The output UP1 for the changeover
valve is activated by configuring the return flow temperature sensor RüF2. The changeover
valve is controlled based on the 'Return flow temperature limit, layering at top' parameter: If
the temperature measured at RüF2/RüF4 exceeds the adjusted switching point, the output
UP1 remains deactivated and the return flow water is layered at the top. After the temperature measured at RüF2 has fallen below the switching point, the output UP1 is activated andthe return flow water is layered at the bottom.
The CO4 -> F14 - 1 setting activates the Thermal disinfection function and the input RüF3 required for this function. It may be necessary for the controller to initially ensure at the start ofevery thermal disinfection that a sufficiently high temperature exists in the buffer tank. Therefore, enough time for the thermal disinfection process must be available.
Alternatively, in systems Anl 3.9, 17.x and 18.x, an electric heating cartridge can be used
for the thermal disinfection process. With the CO4 -> F23 - 1 setting the increased heat demand by the DHW circuit during an active thermal disinfection is not passed on to the buffertank circuit RK1. The measured temperature at SF1 is decisive for the demand for electricheating at the start of a thermal disinfection process and during the entire process: when thetemperature at SF1 is the same or greater than 'Disinfection temperature' (function block parameter in CO4 -> F14) + 'Set point boost' (function block parameter in CO4 -> F14), there
is no demand for electric heating. When the temperature at SF1 is below this limit, the binary output BA10 is activated to demand electric heating.

EB 5578 EN

16-189Annex A (configuration instructions)

Note
The buffer tank control circuit is deactivated as described in section 16.2.4.1. When predefined gradients of heating characteristic (CO1 -> F11 - 0) are used, night mode is not possible in the buffer tank control circuit. In contrast to an active four-point characteristic(CO1 -> F11 - 1): in this case, a four-point characteristic exists for day and night modes.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Storage tank sensor SF2

1

CO1 -> F06 - 1

Speed control of the charging pump

0

CO1 -> F21 - 1

40.0 °C

Start speed reduction, limit: 5.0 to
90.0 °C

50.0 °C

Stop speed reduction, limit: 5.0 to
90.0 °C

20.0 °C

Minimum speed: 0 to 50 %SLP depending on return flow temperature0

CO1 -> F22 - 1

Buffer tank bottom sensor

0

CO1 -> F25 - 1
Buffer tank bottom sensor SF3
active10.0 °C

Limit temperature: 0.0 to 50.0 °C

Discharging protection

0

CO1 -> F27 - 1

Return flow sensor RüF2

0

CO4 -> F03 - 1

Three-step control mode

1

CO4 -> F12 - 1

20 %Minimum speed: 5 to 50 %2.0

KP: 0.1 to 50.0

120 s/30 s

TN: 1 to 999 s

0s

TV: 0 to 999 s

Electric heating cartridge

0

CO4 -> F23 - 1

AA1, AA2 reverse

0

CO5 -> F25, F26 - 1

0%

Zero: 0 to 50 %0

CO5 -> F34, F35 - 1
Function: SLP speed, 'Y4'

AA1, AA2 PWM

16-190EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)Parameters

Default

Parameters: value range

Minimum set point to charge buffer tank

AUTO

PA1 -> P16: AUTO to 90.0 °C

Stop charging of the buffer tank

AUTO

PA1 -> P17: AUTO to 90.0 °C

Charging temperature boost

6.0 °C

PA1 -> P18: 0.0 to 50.0 °C

Lag time of charging pump

1.0

PA1 -> P19: 0.0 to 10.0

Solar circuit pump ON

10.0 °C

PA4 -> P10: 1.0 to 30.0 °C

Solar circuit pump OFF

3.0 °C

PA4 -> P11: 0.0 to 30.0 °C

Max. storage tank temperature

80.0 °C

PA4 -> P12: 20.0 to 90.0 °C

Maximum buffer tank temperature

80.0 °C

PA4 -> P13: 20.0 to 90.0 °C

Return flow temperature limit, layering at top

25.0 °C

PA4 -> P21: 5.0 to 90.0 °C

Start temperature for boiler pump60.0 °C

PA5 -> P01: 20.0 to 90.0 °C

Boiler pump hysteresis

5.0 °C

PA5 -> P02: 0.0 to 30.0 °C

16.2.6 Summer mode
Summer mode is activated depending on the mean daytime temperature (measured between
7.00 h and 22.00 h) during the adjusted summer time period. If the mean daytime temperature exceeds the 'Boost' on the number of successive days set in 'No. days until activation',summer mode is activated on the following day. This means that the valves in all heating circuits are closed and the circulation pumps are switched off after t = 2 x valve transit time. If
the mean daytime temperature falls below the 'Limit' on the number of successive days set in'No. days until deactivation', summer mode is deactivated on the following day.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Summer mode0

CO5 -> F04 - 1

01.06 - 30.09

Time: Adjustable as required2

No. days until activation: 1 to 3

1

No. days until deactivation: 1 to
3

18.0 °C

Limit: 0.0 to 30.0 °C

Note
Summer mode only becomes effective when the controller is in automatic mode ( ).

EB 5578 EN

16-191

Annex A (configuration instructions)16.2.7 Delayed outdoor temperature adaptation
The calculated outdoor temperature is used to determine the flow temperature set point. The
heat response is delayed when the outdoor temperature either increases or decreases orboth. If the outdoor temperature varies by, for example 12 °C within a very short period oftime, the calculated outdoor temperature is adapted to the actual outdoor temperature insmall steps using a delay of 3 °C/h over a time period of t = 12°C= 4 h.
3°C/hNote
The delayed outdoor temperature adaptation helps avoid unnecessary overloads of central
heating stations in combination with either overheated buildings occurring, for example due
to warm winds or temporarily insufficient heating due to the outdoor sensor being exposed
to direct sunshine. In the operating level, the outdoor temperature blinks on the display while
delayed outdoor temperature adaptation is active. A small hour glass appears next to thethermometer on the display when this function is active. The calculated outdoor temperature
is displayed.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Delayed outdoor temperature adaptation 0(decreasing)

CO5 -> F05 - 1
Delay/h: 0.2 to 6.0 °C

Delayed outdoor temperature adaptation 0(increasing)
3.0 °C

CO5 -> F06 - 1
Delay/h: 0.2 to 6.0 °C

16.2.8 Remote operation
Apart from measuring the room temperature, the Types 5257-5 1) and Type 5257-51 RoomPanels (Pt1000 sensor) as well as Type 5244 1) Room Panel (PTC sensor) provide the following opportunities of influencing the control process:Selecting the operatingmode:
Set point correction:

Automatic mode
Day modeNight mode
During rated operation, the room temperature set point can be increased or reduced by up to 5 °C using a continuously adjustablerotary knob.

With an activated room sensor, the measured room temperature is displayed when the remote operation is connected and activated. Nevertheless, it is not used for control when either the optimization, adaptation or flash adaptation function is activated.

16-192EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

Alternatively, the TROVIS 5570 1) Room Panel can be connected over meter bus (see section 16.4.15).
1)

No longer available

FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Room sensor

0

CO1, 2, 3 -> F01 - 1

The following must be configured if a TROVIS 5570 Room Panel is used:
Device bus

0

CO7 -> F01 - 1, device bus address

TROVIS 5570 Room Panel in RK1

0

CO7 -> F03 - 1, device bus address

TROVIS 5570 Room Panel in RK2

0

CO7 -> F04 - 1, device bus address

TROVIS 5570 Room Panel in RK3

0

CO7 -> F05 - 1, device bus address

Note
Room panels cannot be used for the heating circuits RK11, RK12 and RK13.

16.2.9 Optimization
This function requires the use of a room sensor. Depending on the building characteristics,
the controller determines and adapts the required advance heating time (maximum 8 hours)
to ensure that the desired 'Day set point' (rated room temperature) has been reached in thereference room when the time-of-use starts. During the advance heating period, the controller
heats with the max. flow temperature. This temperature is built up in steps of 10 °C. As soon
as the 'Day set point' has been reached, outdoor-temperature-compensated control is activated.
Depending on the room sensor, the controller switches off the heating system up to one hour
before the time-of-use ends. The controller chooses the deactivation time such that the room
temperature does not drop significantly below the desired value until the time-of-use ends.
During the advance heating period and the premature deactivation of the heating system, theor icon blinks on the display.
Outside the times-of-use, the controller monitors the 'Night set point' (reduced room temperature). When the temperature falls below the night set point, the controller heats with the max.
flow temperature until the measured room temperature exceeds the adjusted value by 1 °C.

EB 5578 EN

16-193

Annex A (configuration instructions)

Note− Direct sunshine can cause the room temperature to increase and thus result in the premature deactivation of the heating system.
− When the room temperature decreases while the heating system is shortly outside its timesof-use, this can prematurely cause the controller to heat up to the 'Day set point'.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Room sensor

0

CO1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> F01 - 1

Outdoor sensor

1

CO1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> F02 - 1

Optimization

0

CO1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> F07 - 1

Parameters

Default

Switch position: value range

Day set point

20.0 °C: 0.0 to 40.0 °C

Night set point15.0 °C: 0.0 to 40.0 °C

16.2.10 Flash adaptation
To ensure that the controller reacts immediately to room temperature deviations during rated
and reduced operation, the function block setting CO1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> F09 - 1 needs tobe made. The heating is then always switched off as soon as the room temperature exceeds
the 'Day set point' or 'Night set point' by 2 °C.
Heating first starts again when the room has cooled off and the room temperature is 1 °C
above the set point. The flow temperature set point is corrected if the 'Cycle time' or 'KP(gain)' are set to a value other than 0. The 'Cycle time' determines the intervals at which theflow temperature set point is corrected by 1 °C. A 'KP (gain)' set to a value other than 0causes a direct increase/decrease in flow temperature set point when a sudden deviation inroom temperature arises. A 'KP (gain)' setting of 10.0 is recommended.
Note− Cooling loads, such as drafts or open windows, affect the control process.
− Rooms may be temporarily overheated after the cooling load has been eliminated.

16-194

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Room sensor

0

CO1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> F01 - 1

Outdoor sensor

1

CO1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> F02 - 1

Flash adaptation0
20 min0.0

CO1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> F09 - 1
Cycle time: 0 to 100 min
KP (gain): 0.0 to 25.0

Parameters

Default

Switch position: value range

Day set point

20.0 °C: 0.0 to 40.0 °C

Night set point15.0 °C: 0.0 to 40.0 °C

16.2.10.1 Flash adaptation without outdoor sensor (based on room
temperature)
The flow temperature control starts with 'Day set point' for flow in rated operation or with
'Night set point' for flow in reduced operation as no set points calculated using characteristics exist without an outdoor sensor. The 'Cycle time' determines the intervals at which theflow temperature set point is corrected by 1 °C. The heating is then always switched off assoon as the room temperature exceeds the 'Day set point' or 'Night set point' by 2 °C. Heating first starts again when the room has cooled off and the room temperature is 1 °C above
the set point. A 'KP (gain)' set to a value other than 0 causes a direct increase/decrease inflow temperature set point when a sudden deviation in room temperature arises. A 'KP(gain)' setting of 10.0 is recommended.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Room sensor

0

CO1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> F01 - 1

Outdoor sensor

1

CO1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> F02 - 0

Flash adaptation0
20 min0.0

CO1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> F09 - 1
Cycle time: 1 to 100 min
KP (gain): 0.0 to 25.0

Parameters

Default

Switch position: value range

Day set point

20.0 °C: 0.0 to 40.0 °C

Night set point15.0 °C: 0.0 to 40.0 °C

Parameters

Default

Parameters: value range

Flow set point (day)50.0 °C

PA1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> P03: 5.0 to 150.0 °C

Flow set point (night)

30.0 °C

PA1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> P04: 5.0 to 150.0 °C

EB 5578 EN

16-195

Annex A (configuration instructions)16.2.11 Adaptation
The controller is capable of automatically adapting the heating characteristic to the building
characteristics. A gradient characteristic must be set in this case (CO1, 2, 3, 11, 12,
13 -> F11 - 0). The reference room, where the room sensor is located, represents the entire
building and is monitored to ensure that the room set point ('Day set point') is maintained.
When the mean measured room temperature in rated operation deviates from the adjusted
set point, the heating characteristic is modified accordingly for the following time-of-use. The
corrected value is displayed in PA1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> P01 (Gradient, flow).
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Room sensor

0

CO1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> F01 - 1

Outdoor sensor

CO1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> F02 - 1

Adaptation

0

CO1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> F08 - 1

Four-point characteristic0CO1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> F11 - 0

Parameters

Default

Switch position: value range

Day set point

20.0 °C: 0.0 to 40.0 °C

Night set point15.0 °C: 0.0 to 40.0 °C

Note
If the Flash adaptation function is already configured with a small cycle time, the Adaptation
function should not be configured as well.

16.2.12 Cooling control
Cooling control with outdoor sensor
When the cooling control function is activated in a control circuit with outdoor sensor, thefour-point characteristic of the corresponding control circuit is automatically activated andthe operating direction of the control output is reversed. In PA1, PA2 and/or PA3 the four
points for the course of the set point based on the outdoor temperatures can be adjusted separately for day and night mode. The 'Base point for return flow temperature' that can be adjusted with an active return flow sensor determines the point at which a minimum limitationof the return flow temperature starts: if the measured return flow temperature falls below thisvalue, the flow temperature set point is raised. The four return flow temperature values in thefour-point characteristic function have no effect.

16-196

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

FunctionsDefault

Outdoor sensor

Configuration
CO1, 2, 3 -> F02 - 1

Cooling control

0CO1, 2, 3 -> F04 - 1

Four-point characteristic0CO1, 2, 3 -> F11 - 1

Parameters

Default

Parameters: value range

Outdoor temperature

Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4

5.0 °C
15.0 °C
25.0 °C
35.0 °C

PA1, 2, 3 -> P05: –50.0 to +50.0 °C

Flow temperature

Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 420.0 °C
15.0 °C
10.0 °C
5.0 °C

PA1, 2, 3 -> P05: –5.0 to +150.0 °C

Reduced flow temperature

Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 430.0 °C
25.0 °C
20.0 °C
15.0 °C

PA1, 2, 3 -> P05: –5.0 to +150.0 °C

Base point for return flow
temperature:65.0 °C

PA1, 2, 3 -> P13: 5.0 to 90.0 °C

Note
The limiting factors KP of the Return flow sensor (CO1, 2, 3 -> F03) functions apply duringcooling control as well.
Cooling control without outdoor sensor
When the cooling control function is activated in a control circuit without outdoor sensor, only
the adjustment limits for the day and night set points at the rotary switch as well as the 'Basepoint for return flow temperature' can be adjusted in PA1 and/or PA2.
FunctionsDefault

Outdoor sensor

Configuration
CO1, 2, 3 -> F02 - 0

Cooling control

0CO1, 2, 3 -> F04 - 1

Parameters

Default

Switch position: value range

Flow set point (day)20.0 °C: –5.0 to +150.0 °C

Flow set point (night)

30.0 °C: –5.0 to +150.0 °C

EB 5578 EN

16-197

Annex A (configuration instructions)Parameters

Default

Parameters: value range

Min. flow temperature

20.0 °C

PA1, 2, 3 -> P06: –5.0 to +150.0 °C

Max. flow temperature

90.0 °C

PA1, 2, 3 -> P07: 5.0 to 150.0 °C

Base point for return flow temperature:65.0 °C

PA1, 2, 3 -> P13: 5.0 to 90.0 °C

Note− The limiting factors KP of the Return flow sensor (CO1, 2, 3 -> F03) functions apply duringcooling control as well.
− The request for a signal by downstream control circuits or externally (when a pre-control
circuit is used) is based on the maximum selection. Therefore, systems (e.g. system Anl 5.0)
or controllers connected over a device bus are not suitable for transmitting the signal for required cooling. The 'Set point boost (pre-control circuit)' parameter can only generate higher and not lower set points in the pre-control circuit.

16.2.13 Differential temperature control
In systems Anl 1.0 and 16.0, the differential temperature control causes the delivery rate ofpump UP1 to be adapted through the 0 to 10 V or PWM output depending on the difference
between the secondary flow temperature and the secondary return flow temperature. In system Anl 1.0 the sensor input RüF2 is automatically activated for this purpose with the setting
CO1 -> F23 - 1. In system Anl 16.0, the sensor inputs VF2 and RüF2 are automatically activated. The KP (influence factor) determines how strongly the controller responds when thetemperature deviates from the set point of the differential temperature control. The outputs
AA1 (0 to 10 V) and AA2 (PWM) are available for the differential temperature control. The
output signal can also be reversed, if required.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Differential temperature control

0

CO1 -> F23 - 1

20.0 °C

Set point of differential temperature control: 0.0
to 50.0 °C

1.0AA1, AA2 reverse
AA1, AA2 PWM

20 %KP (influence factor): 0.1 to 10.00

CO5 -> F25, F26 - 1

0%

Zero: 0 to 50 %0CO1 -> F34, F35 - 0

Minimum speed: 0 to 100 %Function: differential temperature control

16-198EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)16.3 Functions of the DHW circuit
16.3.1 DHW heating in the storage tank system
Start storage tank charging
WW
SLP

SF1
ZP

SLP
SF1
ZP
WW
KW

Storage tank charging pump
Storage tank sensor
Circulation pump (DHW)
Hot water
Cold water

KW

Fig. 16-4: Schematics of a storage tank system

The controller begins charging the storage tank when the water temperature measured atstorage tank sensor SF1 falls below the 'DHW temperature set point' by 0.1 °C. If the flow
temperature in the system exceeds the desired charging temperature, the controller tries to reduce the flow temperature in the heating circuit for up to three minutes before the storagetank charging pump is activated. When there is no heating operation or when the flow temperature in the system is lower, the storage tank charging pump is switched on immediately.
If the function CO4 -> F15 - 1 (SLP ON depending on return flow temperature) is activated,
the primary valve is opened without simultaneously operating the storage tank charging
pump. The storage tank charging pump is first switched on when the primary return flow
temperature has reached the temperature currently measured at storage tank sensor SF1.
This function enables storage tank charging when the heating system is switched off, e.g. insummer mode, without cooling down the storage tank first by filling it with cold flow water.
The storage tank charging pump does not start operation before a sufficiently high temperature has been reached at the heat exchanger. An activated setting CO1 -> F27 - 1 (discharging protection) causes the charging to be stopped when the charging temperature does notreach its set point even though the valve is fully open or it falls below the temperature measured at SF1 and does not rise again. Charging with the valve fully open is stopped after one
hour at the latest. In such cases, 'Operation: discharging protection' is displayed with themeasured values in HC1 for the next 30 minutes.

EB 5578 EN

16-199Annex A (configuration instructions)

Note
The 'DHW temperature set point' is to be regarded in relation to the charging temperature if
a storage tank thermostat is used.
Time-controlled switchover of storage tank sensors
By configuring a second storage tank sensor SF2, it is possible to determine by setting thefunction block CO4 -> F19 - 1 that the storage tank sensor SF1 is used for day mode in the
DHW circuit and storage tank sensor SF2 for night mode. As a result, different storage tankvolumes can be kept at a constant temperature according to a time schedule and also at different temperatures if the 'DHW temperature set points' for day and night differ from one another.
Stop storage tank charging
The controller stops charging the storage tank when the water temperature measured at storage tank sensor SF1 has reached the temperature T = 'DHW temperature' + 'Hysteresis'.
When there is no heating operation or when the flow temperature demand in the system islower, the corresponding valve is closed. The storage tank charging pump is switched off after t = 'Lag time of storage tank charging pump' x 'Valve transit time'.
With the default settings, the temperature in the storage tank is increased by 5 °C to reach
65 °C when the storage tank temperature falls below 60 °C. The charging temperature is calculated from the DHW temperature (60 °C) plus the 'Charging temperature boost' (10 °C),
which equals 70 °C. When the storage tank has been charged, the heating valve is closed
and the charging pump continues to run for the time t = P06 x Valve transit time. Outside thetimes-of-use, the storage tank is only charged when the temperature falls below 40 °C('Night set point for DHW temperature'). In this case, the tank is charged with a charging
temperature of 50 °C until 45 °C is reached in the tank.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Storage tank sensor SF1

CO4 -> F01 - 1

Storage tank sensor SF2

CO4 -> F02 (-1 when CO4 -> F19 - 1)

SLP depending on return flow
temperature0

CO4 -> F15

Switchover

0

CO4 -> F19 (-1 only when CO4 -> F02 - 1)

Discharging protection

0

CO4 -> F27 - 1

16-200EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)Parameters

Default

Day set point for DHW temperature or
charging temperature when
CO4 -> F01 - 0

Switch position: value range

60.0 °C: Min. to max. adjustable DHW set point

Night set point for DHW temperature

40.0 °C: Min. to max. adjustable DHW set point

Parameters

Default

Parameters: value range

Min. adjustable DHW set point 1)

40.0 °C

PA4 -> P01: 5.0 to 90.0 °C

Max. adjustable DHW set point

60.0 °C

PA4 -> P02: 5.0 to 90.0 °C

5.0 °C

PA4 -> P03: 0.0 to 30.0 °C

10.0 °C

PA4 -> P04: 1.0 to 50.0 °C

Hysteresis

1)

2)

Charging temperature boost 3)

Lag time for storage tank charging pump 1.0
1)
2)
3)

PA4 -> P19 x Valve transit time: 0.0 to 10.0

Parameters serve as limitation of the adjustment range for the DHW temperature to be set at the rotary switch
Deactivation value T = DHW temperature + 'Hysteresis'
Charging temperature T = DHW temperature + 'Charging temperature boost'

16.3.1.1 DHW circuit additionally controlled by a globe valve
In systems Anl 7.1, 8.1, 9.1, 9.5, 11.1, 12.1, 13.1 and 21.1, the following versions withglobe valve can be configured instead of the three-way valve control in the DHW circuit:
WW
Rk2/AA2

SLP

SF1
ZP

VF2

KW

HC2/Y2 Control circuit/valve 2
SLP
Storage tank charging pump
SF1
Storage tank sensor
VF2
Flow sensor
ZP
Circulation pump (DHW)WW
Hot water
KW
Cold water

Fig. 16-5: Schematics of a storage tank system with a globe valve for return flow temperature
limitation

Globe valve and flow sensor VF2 are used exclusively for return flow temperature limitationin the schematics shown above. The pre-control circuit provides at least the same flow temperature as in the standard schematic version which is calculated from DHW temperature set
point + Charging temperature boost + Boost set point of pre-control circuit.

EB 5578 EN

16-201

Annex A (configuration instructions)

The functions and parameters of the DHW heating in the storage tank system are upgradedby the following settings:
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Return flow control

0

CO4 -> F20 - 1

Parameters

Default

Parameters: value range

Max. return flow temperature

65.0 °C

PA4 -> P07: 20.0 to 90.0 °C

16.3.2 DHW heating in the storage tank charging system
Start storage tank charging

SLP
TLP

WW
SF1
ZP

VF
SF2

KW

TLP Heat exchanger charging
pump
VF
Flow sensor
SLP Storage tank charging
pump
SF1 Storage tank sensor
SF2 Storage tank sensor
ZP
Circulation pump (DHW)WW Hot water
KW Cold water

Fig. 16-6: Schematics of a storage tank charging system

The controller begins charging the storage tank when the water temperature measured atstorage tank sensor SF1 falls below the 'DHW temperature set point' by 0.1 °C. If the flow
temperature in the system exceeds the desired charging temperature, the controller tries to reduce the flow temperature in the heating circuit for up to three minutes before the exchanger
charging pump is activated together with the storage tank charging pump. When there is no
heating operation or when the flow temperature in the system is lower, the exchanger
charging pump is switched on. If the temperature currently measured at storage tank sensor
SF1 is reached at the flow sensor VF, the storage tank charging pump is switched on.
An activated setting CO1 -> F27 - 1 (discharging protection) causes the charging to be
stopped when the charging temperature does not reach its set point even though the valve isfully open or it falls below the temperature measured at SF1 and does not rise again.
Charging with the valve fully open is stopped after one hour at the latest. In such cases, 'Op-

16-202EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)eration: discharging protection' is displayed with the measured values in HC1 for the next 30
minutes.
If a storage tank thermostat is used, the storage tank charging pump is switched on as soon
as the temperature T = Charging temperature – 5 °C is reached at the flow sensor VF. If a
storage tank thermostat is used, the storage tank charging pump is switched on when thetemperature T = Charging temperature – 5 °C is reached at the flow sensor VF.
Note
The 'DHW temperature set point' is to be regarded in relation to the charging temperature if
a storage tank thermostat is used.
When the flow sensor VF4 is activated, the set point in the heat exchanger circuit is influenced by the system deviation in the storage tank charging circuit upon activation of the storage tank charging pump: if the temperature measured at flow sensor VF4 is lower than thedesired 'Charging temperature', the set point in the heat exchanger circuit is increased insteps of 1 °C. When the set point in the heat exchanger charging circuit reaches the 'Max.
charging temperature', the set point is no longer increased. An error message (Max.
charging temp.) is generated.
Note
The set point in the heat exchanger circuit which is valid at the end of the charging cycle will
be used again at the beginning of the next cycle.
If times-of-use have been programmed for DHW heating, the 'DHW temperature set point'
adjusted at the rotary switch is applied during these times-of-use. Outside the times-of-use,
the night set point for DHW temperature is used. This does not apply when a storage tankthermostat is used.
Time-controlled switchover of storage tank sensors
By configuring a second storage tank sensor SF2, it is possible to determine by setting thefunction block CO4 -> F19 - 1 that the storage tank sensor SF1 is used for day mode in the
DHW circuit and storage tank sensor SF2 for night mode. As a result, different storage tankvolumes can be kept at a constant temperature according to a time schedule and also at different temperatures if the 'DHW temperature set points' for day and night differ from one another.

EB 5578 EN

16-203

Annex A (configuration instructions)

Stop storage tank charging
The controller stops charging the storage tank when the water temperature measured at storage tank sensor SF2 has reached the temperature T = 'DHW temperature' + 'Hysteresis'. To
do so, the heat exchanger charging pump is immediately switched off. When there is no
heating operation or when the flow temperature demand in the system is lower, the corresponding valve is closed. The storage tank charging pump is switched off after the time has
elapsed t = P06 x valve transit time.
FunctionsDefault

Storage tank sensor SF1

Configuration
CO4 -> F01 - 1

Storage tank sensor SF2

CO4 -> F02 - 1

Flow sensor

0

CO4 -> F05

Switchover

0

CO4 -> F19

Discharging protection

0

CO4 -> F27 - 1

Parameters

Default

Switch position: value range

Day set point for DHW temperature or
charging temperature when
CO4 -> F01 - 0

60.0 °C

Night set point for DHW temperature

40.0 °C

Min. adjustable DHW set point1)

40.0 °C

PA4 -> P01: 5.0 to 90.0 °C

Max. adjustable DHW set point 1)

60.0 °C

PA4 -> P02: 5.0 to 90.0 °C

Hysteresis 2)

5.0 °C

PA4 -> P03: 1.0 to 30.0 °C

10.0 °C

PA4 -> P04: 0.0 to 50.0 °C

80.0 °C

PA4 -> P05: 20.0 to 150.0 °C (only with VF4)

Charging temperature boost
Max. charging temperature3)

Lag time for storage tank charging pump 1.0
1)
2)
3)

: Min. to max. adjustable DHW set point: Min. to max. adjustable DHW set point

PA4 -> P06: 0.0 to 10.0

Parameters serve as limitation of the adjustment range for the DHW temperature to be set at the rotary switch
Deactivation value T = DHW temperature + 'Hysteresis'
Charging temperature T = DHW temperature + 'Charging temperature boost'

16-204

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)16.3.2.1 Cold charging protection
In system Anl 1.1(-1), the cold charging protection function causes a storage tank charging
to be started first when the primary flow temperature is sufficiently high enough. The CO4 ->F22 - 1 setting automatically activates the FG2 input to measure the primary flow temperature. If the measured primary flow temperature is lower than the measured storage tank temperature (e.g. due too a supply line that has cooled down at the start of a storage tankcharging), the heating circuit valve is only opened 10 % at first. The storage tank charging is
not released in absolute priority operation until the primary flow temperature has risen
enough as a result. Parallel operation must be additionally configured if it is required.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Cold charging protection

0
10 %CO4 -> F22 - 1
Valve position: 1 to 100 %Parallel pump operation0
10 min40.0 °C

CO4 -> F06 - 1
Stop: 0 to 10 min
Temperature limit: 20.0 to 90.0 °C

16.3.3 DHW heating in instantaneous heating system
WW
VF

WW
VF

VF
ZP
WW
KW

ZP

Flow sensor
Circulation pump (DHW)Hot ZP
water
Cold water
KW
Water flow sensor

KW

Fig. 16-7: Schematics of an instantaneous heating system

Without a water rate sensor or flow switch, the control of the required DHW temperature at
the flow sensor VF is only active during times-of-use of the circulation pump ZP. The waterflow sensor or flow switch allows the controller to recognize when DHW tapping starts andstops. Control of the required DHW temperature can made to be active only during DHW
tapping by deleting all times-of-use of the circulation pump. If the control with flow rate sensor is configured, the attenuation in the DHW circuit (CO4 -> F13 - 1) is automatically activated and the temperature set to 8 °C.

EB 5578 EN

16-205

Annex A (configuration instructions)

The control of the required DHW temperature at the flow sensor VF is only active during
times-of-use of the circulation pump ZP.
If a water flow sensor is connected (see Fig. 16-7), make sure that the function '10 V supply'is configured with the CO5 -> F34 setting.
Note
After entering the key number 1999, the status information, e.g. operating point, valve controller (influence of the PI component on the valve position) and valve sensor (influence of themanipulated variable on the valve position), is displayed in the extended operating level as apercent after the sectional display of the DHW circuit.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Flow rate sensor

0
AnalogCO4 -> F04 - 1
Select: Analog (flow rate sensor), Binary (flowswitch)AA1 PWM

0

CO4 -> F34 - 0
Function: 10 V supply
Switch position: value range

Parameters

Default

Day set point for DHW temperature

60.0 °C: Min. to max. adjustable DHW set point

Night set point for DHW temperature

40.0 °C: Min. to max. adjustable DHW set point

Parameters

Default

Parameters: value range

Min. adjustable DHW set point

40.0 °C

PA4 -> P01: 5.0 to 90.0 °C

Max. adjustable DHW set point

60.0 °C

PA4 -> P02: 5.0 to 90.0 °C

16.3.4 Domestic hot water heating with solar system
The systems Anl 1.3, 1.4, 1.7, 1.8, 2.3, 2.4, 3.3, 3.4, 4.3, 10.3, 11.3 and 11.4 are fittedwith a solar system for DHW heating. In these systems, the difference between the temperatures measured at the storage tank sensor SF3 and the sensor VF3 at the solar collector is determined. The 'Solar circuit pump ON' parameter determines the minimum temperature difference between sensors VF3 and SF3 required to activate the solar circuit pump. If the temperature difference falls below the value of 'Solar circuit pump OFF', the solar circuit pump is
switched off. Basically, the solar circuit pump is also switched off when either the water temperature measured at sensor SF3 has reached the 'Max. storage tank temperature' or when
the solar collector temperature rises above 120 °C.

16-206

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)Note
The times-of-use of the DHW circuit do not affect the operation of the solar system.
After the key number 1999 has been entered, the operating hours of the solar pump are displayed in extended operating level (see the ‘Setup’ section).
Parameters

Default

Parameters: value range

Solar circuit pump ON

10.0 °C

PA4 -> P10: 1.0 to 30.0 °C

Solar circuit pump OFF

3.0 °C

PA4 -> P11: 0.0 to 30.0 °C

Max. storage tank temperature

80.0 °C

PA4 -> P12: 20.0 to 90.0 °C

16.3.5 Intermediate heatingThis function can only be activated in systems Anl 2.x, 4.1 to 4.5, 8.x, 9.5 and 9.6.
With the setting CO4 -> F07 - 1, heating operation of the UP1 heating circuit is reactivatedfor a period of ten minutes after 20 minutes of priority operation (heating deactivated during
DHW heating). By setting CO4 -> F07 - 0, storage tank charging is given unlimited priority
over the heating operation in the UP1 heating circuit.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Intermediate heating

1

CO4 -> F07 - 1

16.3.6 Parallel pump operation
This function can only be activated in systems Anl 1.1-1, 2.x, 4.1 to 4.5, 6.1, 8.x, 9.5 and9.6.
When CO4 -> F06 - 1, the circulation pump UP1 remains activated during DHW heating.
This does not include operating situations during which the current flow temperature demandof the pump circuit is lower than the adjusted 'Temperature limit'. In this case, the controller
applies priority operation, if necessary with intermediate heating. Once a parallel pump operation cycle has been activated and the time period set in 'Stop' has elapsed, system deviations greater than 5 °C cause the controller to suspend parallel operation for 10 minutes andto apply priority operation.

EB 5578 EN

16-207

Annex A (configuration instructions)

Setting 'Stop' to 0 min leads to a parallel operation once initiated remaining regardless of adeviation.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Parallel pump operation0
10 min40.0 °C

CO4 -> F06 - 1
Stop: 0 to 10 min
Temperature limit: 20.0 to 90.0 °C

16.3.7

Circulation pump during storage tank charging

With the setting CO4 -> F11 - 1, the circulation pump (DHW) continues operation according
to the programmed time schedule even during storage tank charging. With the setting
CO4 -> F11 - 0, the circulation pump is switched off as soon as the storage tank charging
pump is activated. The circulation pump starts to operate again according to the time schedule when the storage tank charging pump has been switched off again.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Operation of circulation pump (DHW)
during storage tank charging

0

CO4 -> F11

16.3.8 Priority circuit
In many district heating systems with primary DHW heating, the allotted amount of watercannot meet DHW heating and heating operation demands when they are required at thesame time. As a result, the capacity required for DHW heating needs to be taken from theheating system when great heating loads occur; and this, until DHW demand has been concluded. Nevertheless, heating operation is not to be interrupted simply. Only the amount ofenergy required for DHW heating is to be deducted. This can be achieved by using the priority functions: reverse control and set-back operation.

16.3.8.1 Reverse control
In all systems with DHW heating and at least one heating circuit with a control valve, DHW
heating can be given priority by applying reverse control. With the setting CO4 -> F08 - 1,
the temperature is monitored at sensor VFx.
In systems without sensor VFx in the DHW circuit (e.g. systems Anl 4.5, 11.0, 12.0, 13.0
and 21.0), the temperature is monitored directly at storage tank sensor SF1. If system deviations still occur after the time set in 'Start' has elapsed, the set point of the heating circuit withthe control valve is gradually reduced each minute until the flow temperature set point has

16-208EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)reached 5 °C at the minimum. How strongly the controller responds is determined by the 'KP'
(influence factor).
When 'Start' is set to 0, the priority operation is started regardless of the time and temperature in the system. The control valves of the corresponding heating circuits are closed.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Priority (reverse)

0
2 min
1.0

CO4 -> F08 - 1
Start: 0 to 10 min
KP (influence factor): 0.1 to 10.0
Control circuit: HC1, HC2, HC3, HC1+HC2,
HC1+HC3

Priority (set-back)0

CO4 -> F09 - 0

16.3.8.2 Set-back operation
In all systems with DHW heating and at least one heating circuit with a control valve, DHW
heating can be given priority by applying set-back operation. With the setting CO4 ->F09 - 1, the temperature is monitored at sensor VFx in the DHW circuit.
In systems without sensor VFx in the DHW circuit (e.g. systems Anl 4.5, 11.0, 12.0, 13.0
and 21.0), the temperature is monitored directly at storage tank sensor SF1. If system deviations still occur after the time set in Start has elapsed, the selected heating circuits with thecontrol valve are set to reduced operation.
When 'Start' is set to 0, the priority operation is started in all heating circuits regardless ofthe time and temperature in the system.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Priority (reverse)

0

CO4 -> F08 - 0

Priority (set-back)

0
2 min

CO4 -> F09 - 1
Start: 0 to 10 min
Control circuit: HC1, HC2, HC3, HC1+HC2,
HC1+HC3

16.3.9 Forced charging of DHW storage tank
To provide the full network performance for room heating when the time-of-use of the heating circuits begins, any storage tanks are charged one hour before the time-of-use of theheating circuits starts. For the individual controller, this means that storage tank charging is
activated when the water temperature in the storage tank falls below the adjusted deactivation value of T = 'DHW temperature' + 'Hysteresis'.

EB 5578 EN

16-209Annex A (configuration instructions)

The forced charging of the storage tank does not take place when the DHW circuit is not
used at the beginning of the time-of-use set for the heating circuit(s).
NoteThis function is not available when a storage tank thermostat is used.

16.3.10 Thermal disinfection of DHW storage tank
In all systems with DHW heating, a thermal disinfection is performed on a selected day of
the week or daily.
− In systems with DHW storage tank, it is heated up, taking into account the Charging temperature boost parameter (or Set point boost, depending on the system) to the adjusted
Disinfection temperature. Disinfection takes place within the adjusted time period ('Time').
− In systems with DHW heating in instantaneous heating system, the function remains active taking into account the Boost parameter until the circulation pipe, measured at storage tank sensor SF1, has reached the adjusted Disinfection temperature, provided disinfection has not been terminated prematurely at the end of the adjusted time period(Time).
− In systems with storage tank charging system, the CO4 -> F24 -1 setting can be used toactivate the sensor RüF2 instead of SF1 or SF2 to switch off the thermal disinfection.
The 'Duration' determines how long the disinfection temperature must be maintained within
the adjusted time period to rate the process successful. If the Duration is set to a value otherthan 0, no intermediate heating operation takes place during thermal disinfection.
When the 'Disinfection temperature' has not been reached before the end of the thermal disinfection cycle, it is indicated correspondingly on the display. This error message can also be
generated prematurely if the remaining time until the disinfection temperature is reached isshorter than the adjusted 'Duration'. The indication is automatically reset when the disinfection temperature is properly reached during the following thermal disinfection cycle.
Thermal disinfection for preventing legionella infection causes:− Excessively high return flow temperatures during the disinfection cycle (return flow temperature limitation suspended)− Excessively high DHW temperatures after thermal disinfection has been concluded− Possibly lime scale, which can have a negative effect on heat exchanger performance.

16-210EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

Note
This function is not available when a storage tank thermostat is used.
The return flow temperature limitation in the primary control circuit is deactivated also whilethermal disinfection is active in a secondary controller in controllers linked with each otherover a device bus.
Note
The forced operation of the circulation pump (DHW) starts while thermal disinfection is active.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Storage tank sensor
SF1

1

CO4 -> F01 - 1

Thermaldisinfection

0
Wednesday
00:00
04:00
70.0 °C
10.0 °C
0 min
ON

CO4 -> F14 - 1
Monday, Tuesday, ..., daily
Start: adjustable as required in steps of 15 minutes
End: adjustable as required in steps of 15 minutes
Disinfection temperature: 60.0 to 90.0 °C
Set point boost: 0.0 to 50.0 °C 1)
Duration: 0 to 255 min
Active when BI = ON, OFF (start of disinfection with terminal
BI17) 2)

Bottom sensor
for thermal
disinfection

0

CO4 -> F24 - 1: only when CO4 -> F14 - 1
Sensor RüF2 as switch-off sensor active

1)
2)

Systems Anl 1.9, 3.9, 5.9, 11.0, 11.3, 11.5, 11.9, 12.0, 12.9, 13.0, 13.9, 17.x, 18.x, 21.0 and
21.9 only
B117 only functions when the time is set to 00:00 - 00:00 h

EB 5578 EN

16-211

Annex A (configuration instructions)16.4 System-wide functions
16.4.1 Automatic summer/standard time switchover
The time is automatically changed on the last Sunday in March at 2.00 h and on the lastSunday in October at 3.00 h.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Summer time1

CO5 -> F08 - 1

Note
The automatic summer/standard time switchover can also be programmed in the Time/datemenu (see the 'Setup' section).

16.4.2 Frost protection
Frost protection measures are taken when the outdoor temperature falls below 'Limit'. The
switching differential to cancel the frost protection measures is always 1 °C.
Restricted frost protection: frost protection measures are taken only when all heating circuitsin the system are in stand-by mode. The circulation pumps are automatically switched on andtheir flow temperature set points are adjusted to 10 °C. The circulation pump in the DHW circuit is automatically switched on only when the stand-by mode has been adjusted at the rotary switch in all heating circuits. Nevertheless, the storage tank is always recharged to 10 °C
if the storage tank temperature falls below 5 °C.
Frost protection with highest priority: the heating circuit circulation pumps are always
switched on automatically. The flow temperature set points of all heating circuits currently instand-by mode are set to +10 °C. In the DHW circuit, the circulation pump is always activated. If the storage tank temperature falls below +5 °C, the storage tank is recharged to+10 °C.
FunctionsDefault

Frost protection

Configuration
CO5 -> F09 - 0: Restricted frost protection
CO5 -> F09 - 1: Highest priority for frost protection

3.0 °C

16-212

Limit: –15.0 to +3.0 °C

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

Note
Frost protection operation of a pump, a heating circuit or the DHW circuit is only active when
the frost protection icon is displayed.
! NOTICE
System damage caused by frost.
In the stand-by mode ( ) fixed set point control without outdoor temperature sensor does notinclude frost protection.
Î Do not switch off closed-loop operation for a long time during cold weather.

16.4.3 Forced pump operation
When the heating circuit pumps have not been activated for 24 hours, forced operation of
the pumps is started between 12.02 h and 12.03 h. This is done to avoid that the pumps getstuck when they are not operated for long periods of time. In the DHW circuit, the circulation
pump is operated between 12.04 h and 12.05 h, the other pumps between 12.05 h and12.06 h.

16.4.4 Return flow temperature limitation
The temperature difference between the flow and return flow in a network indicates how wellthe energy is used: the greater the difference, the higher the efficiency. A return flow sensor
RÜF is sufficient to evaluate the temperature difference when the flow temperatures are predefined. The return flow temperature can be limited either to a value depending on the outdoor temperature (variable) or to a fixed set point. When the temperature measured at return
flow sensor RüF exceeds the current return flow temperature limit, the set point of the flow
temperature (flow temperature of the heating system, charging temperature) is reduced. This
causes the primary flow rate to be reduced and the return flow temperature to drop. In systems Anl 2.x, 3.1 to 3.4, 4.1 to 4.4, 5.1, 5.2, 7.x, 8.x and 9.x, the 'Max. return flow temperature' parameter (PA4 level) is used for limitation in the primary circuit during DHW heating if it is greater than the parameter valid for the primary circuit. The KP (limiting factor) determines how strongly the controller responds when the limits are exceeded in either direction(PI algorithm).

EB 5578 EN

16-213

Annex A (configuration instructions)If just the proportional component is to be implemented, set CO5 -> F16 - 1. This allows theintegral-action component in the return flow temperature limitation algorithm of all control
circuits of the controller to be deactivated. The set point reading (flow temperature of theheating, charging temperature) blinks to indicate that a return flow limitation is active in thecontrol circuit concerned.
Note
When outdoor-temperature-compensated control with gradient characteristic is used, the return flow temperature is limited to a fixed value by equating the 'Base point for return flow
temperature' and 'Max. return flow temperature' (PA1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> P13 and P14)
parameters.
FunctionsDefault

Return flow sensor RüF1/2/3

CO1, 2, 3, 4, 11, 12, 13 -> F03 - 1
1.0

Return flow temperature limitation with P 0
algorithm 1)
1)

Configuration
KP (limiting factor): 0.1 to 10.0
CO5 -> F16

If the controller indicates CO5 -> F00 - 1, any access to the return flow, flow rate and capacity settings is locked.

Parameters

Default

Parameters: value range

Return flow gradient1.2

PA1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> P11: 0.2 to 3.2

Return flow level

0.0 °C

PA1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> P12: –30.0 to +30.0 °C

Base point for return flow temperature:65.0 °C

PA1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> P13: 5.0 to 90.0 °C

Max. return flow temperature
Max. return flow temperature

65.0 °C
65.0 °C

PA1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> P14: 5.0 to 90.0 °C
PA4 -> P07: 5.0 to 90.0 °C

Parameters

Default

Parameters: value range

Return flow temperature, points 1 to 4

65.0 °C

PA1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> P05: 5.0 to 90.0 °C

or:

Note
To ensure that the preset return flow temperature limit can be met, make sure that the heating
characteristic is not adjusted to ascend too steeply, the speed of the circulation pumps is not
set too high and the heating systems have been balanced.

16-214

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)16.4.5 Condensate accumulation control
Activate the damping function to start up condensate accumulation plants, in particular to
avoid problematic excess temperatures. The controller response to set point deviations whichcause the primary valve to open is attenuated. The controller response to set point deviations
which cause the control valve to close remains unaffected.
Note
The condensate accumulation control function can only be activated when the control circuit
concerned is controlled using a PI algorithm (three-step control).
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Control mode

1

CO1, 2, 3, 4, 11, 12, 13 -> F12 - 1

Damping0
3.0 °C

CO1, 2, 3, 4, 11, 12, 13 -> F13 - 1
Max. system deviation: 3.0 to 10.0 °C

16.4.6 Three-step control
The flow temperature can be controlled using a PI algorithm. The valve reacts to pulses thatthe controller sends when a system deviation occurs. The length of the first pulse, in particular, depends on the extent of the system deviation and the selected 'KP (gain)' (the pulse
length increases as KP increases). The pulse and pause lengths change continuously until thesystem deviation has been eliminated. The pause length between the single pulses is greatly
influenced by the 'Tn (reset time)' (the pause length increases as TN increases). The 'TY (valve
transit time)' specifies the time required by the valve to travel through the range of 0 to
100 %.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Control mode

1
2.0
120 s
0s
35 s

CO1, 2, 3, 4, 11, 12, 13 -> F12 - 1
KP (gain): 0.1 to 50.0
Tn (reset time): 1 to 999 s
TV (derivative-action time): do not change thevalue.
TY (valve transit time): 15, 20, 25, … , 240 s

EB 5578 EN

16-215

Annex A (configuration instructions)16.4.7 On/off control
The flow temperature can be controlled, for example by activating and deactivating a boiler.
The controller switches on the boiler when the flow temperature falls below the set point by T
= 0.5 x 'Hysteresis'. When the set point is exceeded by T = 0.5 x 'Hysteresis', the boiler isswitched off again. The greater the value you choose for 'Hysteresis', the less frequent switching on and off will be. By setting the 'Minimum ON time', an activated boiler remains
switched on during this period regardless of the flow temperature fluctuations. Similarly, adeactivated boiler will remain switched off regardless of the flow temperature fluctuations if
the 'Min. OFF time' has been specified.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Control mode

1
5.0 °C
2 min
2 min

CO1, 2, 3, 4, 11, 12, 13 -> F12 - 0
Hysteresis: 1.0 to 30.0 °C
Min. ON time: 0 to 10 min
Min. OFF time: 0 to 10 min

16.4.8 Continuous control in control circuit HC1
The flow temperature in the control circuit HC1 can be controlled using a PID algorithm. The
valve in RK1 control circuit receives an analog 0 to 10 V signal from the controller. When asystem deviation occurs, 'KP (gain)' immediately causes the 0 to 10 V signal to change (thegreater the KP, the greater the change). The integral component becomes effective with time:'Tn (reset time)' represents the time which elapses until the integral component has changed
the output signal to the same extent as the immediate change performed by the proportional
component (the greater Tn is, the slower the rate of change will be). Due to the derivative
component, any change of the system deviation is incorporated into the output signal with acertain gain (the greater TV is, the stronger the change will be).
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Control mode

1
2.0
120 s
0s
35 s

CO1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13 -> F12 - 1
KP (gain): 0.1 to 50.0
Tn (reset time): 1 to 999 s
TV (derivative-action time): 0 to 999 s
TY (valve transit time): 15, 20, 25, … , 240 s

16-216

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)16.4.9 Releasing a control circuit/controller with binary input
The release of an individual control circuit or the controller with the binary input only becomes effective when the respective control circuit is in automatic mode ( icon). The released control circuit always works in automatic mode; the deactivated control circuit behaves as if it were transferred to stand-by mode. It remains active, however, in any case forprocessing an external demand. The control circuit can be released by the binary input when
the binary input is either a make contact ('Active when BI' = OFF) or a break contact ('Active
when BI' = ON).
Note
− In systems with downstream heating circuit without a valve (system Anl 2.x, 4.x), BI1 only
influences the operation of this heating circuit when Release control circuit is configured,
while the operation of the entire controller (including the control circuits of the connected
TROVIS I/O expansion modules; excluding the processing of external demand) is influenced when Release controller is configured.
− In system Anl 3.0, BI15 influences the operation of the entire controller (except for processing an external demand) when Release control circuit is configured.
− In buffer tank systems Anl 15.x and 16.x, BI15 influences only the operation of the buffertank charging circuit when Release control circuit is configured.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Enable0CO1, 2, 3 -> F14 - 1 1)

Release controller

0

CO5 -> F15 - 1 1)

ON

1)

Active when BI = ON, OFF

16.4.10 Speed control of the charging pumpThis function allows the delivery rate of the charging pump in systems with buffer tank
(CO1 -> F21 - 1) and in systems with DHW storage tank (CO4 -> F21 - 1) to be varied
based on the temperature. When this function is activated, the input SF2 is automatically activated. In combination with CO1 -> F06 - 0 or CO4 -> F02 - 0, this input is only used forspeed control and not to stop the storage tank charging. If CO1 -> F26 - 1 or CO4 -> F26 1 is also configured, another sensor can be determined for speed control in these function
blocks. 'RüF2' is set by default as the function block parameter. Sensors in the selection listthat are already assigned to a function and would consequently be used twice as a result aremarked by an exclamation mark in front of the sensor designation. The sensor assigned in

EB 5578 EN

16-217

Annex A (configuration instructions)

F26 - 1 is designated as 'SLP sensor' in the operating level. The outputs AA1 (0 to 10 V) andAA2 (PWM) are available for adapting the delivery rate of the charging pump SLP based on
the temperature. The output signal can also be reversed, if required.
All storage tank charging actions start with the minimum delivery rate of the charging
pumps. As soon as the charging temperature is nearly reached, the delivery rate of thecharging pump is increased and the valve controls the flow rate. If the charging temperaturedrops 5 °C below its associated set point, the delivery rate is reduced again. At the latest
when the temperature at SF2 has reached the 'Start' value to reduce the delivery rate, the linear reduction of the delivery rate based on the temperature at SF2 starts. If the temperature
at SF2 reaches the 'Stop' value to reduce the delivery rate, the charging pump runs again at
the minimum delivery rate. Following the lag time, the charging pump is finally deactivatedwhen the storage is fully charged.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Speed control of thecharging pump0
40.0 °C
50.0 °C
20 %CO1 -> F21 - 1 or CO4 -> F21 - 1
Start speed reduction - SF2 limit: 5.0 to 90.0 °C
Stop speed reduction - SF2 limit: 5.0 to 90.0 °C
Minimum speed: 0 to 50 %SLP temperature sensor

0
RüF2

CO1 -> F26 - 1 or CO4 -> F26 - 1
Sensor: AF1 to SF3

AA1, AA2 reverse

00%

CO5 -> F25 , F26- 1
Zero: 0 to 50 %AA1, AA2 PWM

0

CO5 -> F34, F35 - 1
Function: SLP speed

16.4.11 Processing an external demand
The controller can process binary or analog requests for an externally required signal by amore complex secondary system. A binary request can only be processed when the input
SF3 or FG3 is not assigned. Processing of external demand by device bus can also be configured.
Note
Overheating may occur in the heating circuits of the primary controller without control valve.

16-218EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

Excessive charging temperatures in DHW circuits without control valve controlled by the primary controller are excluded when the default settings of the controller are used: while storage tank charging is active, no flow temperature higher than the charging temperature isused by the primary controller. If the Priority for external demand function is activated, theexternal demand is also processed during storage tank charging. The heating circuits can be
configured in such a way that they only process external demand. The possible settings foreach heating circuit do not apply with this configuration as only the external demand is processed with associated UP as feeder pump.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Priority for external demand0

CO4 -> F16 - 1

Demand only00
0

CO1 -> F24 - 1
CO2 -> F24 - 1
CO3 -> F24 - 1

Binary demand processing
Regardless of the operating mode set for control circuit, except for manual mode, the controller regulates the flow temperature in the heating circuit concerned when either the binary input (terminals 17/18) is a make contact ('Active when BI' = OFF) or a break contact ('Active
when BI' = ON) in control circuit HC1 to at least the adjusted flow temperature adjusted in
PA1 -> P10 ('Minimum flow temperature set point HC for binary demand processing').
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Demand processing, 0 to 10 V0

CO1, 2, 3 -> F16 - 0

Binary demand processing

0ON

CO1 -> F17 - 1
Active when BI = ON, OFF

Parameters

Default

Parameters: value range

Minimum flow temperature set point HC
for binary demand processing

40.0 °C

PA1 -> P10: 5.0 to 150.0 °C

Demand processing, 0 to 10 V
Regardless of the operating mode set for the control circuit affected (except for manualmode), the controller regulates the flow temperature at least to the temperature corresponding with the 0 to 10 V signal at the 0 to 10 V input.

EB 5578 EN

16-219Annex A (configuration instructions)

FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Demand processing, 0 to 10 V0

CO1, 2, 3 -> F16 - 1

AE Zero shift

0

CO5 -> F31 - 0

0 °C

Lower transmission range: 0 to 150 °C

120 °C

Upper transmission range: 0 to 150 °C

0

CO5 -> F31 - 1

5%

Zero: 5 to 20 %0 °C

Lower transmission range: 0 to 150 °C

120 °C

Upper transmission range: 0 to 150 °C

Binary demand processing

0

CO1 -> F17 - 0

Parameters

Default

Parameter level: value range

Set point boost (primary exchanger control)

5 °C

PA1, 2, 3: 0 to 50 °C

16.4.12 External demand using a 0 to 10 V signal
The controller can request a demand for the maximum flow set point (with boost, if need be)by issuing an analog signal for external demand. For this purpose, the 0 to 10 V output isused.
Analog, binary signals or requests processed over the device bus are integrated into the analog request for an external demand.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

External demand

0
0.0 °C
120.0 °C
0.0 °C

CO1 -> F18 - 1
Lower transmission range: 0.0 to 150.0 °C
Upper transmission range: 0.0 to 150.0 °C
Boost: 0.0 to 30.0 °C

AA1 PWM

0

CO5 -> F34 - 0
Function: external demand

16-220EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)16.4.13 Capacity limitation in RK1
The capacity can be limited based on a pulse signal to 800 pulse/h at terminals 17/18. This
only applies to systems which do not use input SF3/FG3. Three different operating situations
exist:− A system with simultaneous room and DHW heating requires maximum energy.
− A system with a fully charged storage tank that is only used for room heating requires
less energy.
− A system that suspends room heating during DHW heating requires less energy.
As a result, three different maximum limit values can be adjusted:− Max. limit value to determine the absolute upper limit− 'Max. limit (heating)' to operate room heating only
− Max. limit (DHW) to operate DHW heating only
In all systems without DHW heating or without heating circuit, only the Max. limit value forthe capacity can be specified. If the 'Max. limit' or 'Max. limit (heating)' parameter is set to'OT', a four-point characteristic configured in CO1 -> F11 - 1 allows the input of four capacity limits for outdoor-temperature-compensated capacity limitation in addition to the outdoor,
flow and return flow temperature values.
All limits are adjusted as pulses per hour (pulses/h). As the reading for the current pulse rate
P in pulse/h (–> extended operating level, key number 1999) is calculated based on the timeinterval between incoming pulses, the controller naturally cannot react immediately to every
sudden capacity change in the system.
The flow set point of the control circuit RK1 is reduced when the pulse rate reaches the currently valid maximum limit. The Limiting factor determines how strongly the controller responds.
Example to determine the limit:
If a capacity of 30 kW is to be limited, the following limit must be set in a heat meter, whichissues one pulse per kilowatt hour:
30 kW
P=

1 kWh/
pulse= 30 pulses/h

Note
If the controller indicates CO5 -> F00 - 1, any access to the return flow, flow rate and capacity settings is locked.
EB 5578 EN

16-221

Annex A (configuration instructions)

FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Capacity limitation in RK1 1)

0
15 pulses/h
15 pulses/h
15 pulses/h
1.0

CO5 -> F10 - 1
Maximum limit: OT to 800 m³/h
Max. limit (heating) 2): OT to 800 pulses/hMax. limit (DHW) 2): 1 to 800 pulses/hLimiting factor: 0.1 to 10.0

Capacity limitation in RK1 by meter bus

0

CO6 -> F12 - 0

1)
2)

Not in system Anl 1.9
Not in systems Anl 1.0, 1.5-1.8, 3.0, 3.5, 3.9, 4.0, 5.9, 7.x, 10.x, 11.x, 12.x, 13.x, 14.x, 15.x,
16.x, 17.x, 18.x, 21.x and 25.x

16.4.14 Creep feed rate limitation with a binary input
It is possible to report to the controller when the creep feed rate has fallen below a certain
level by using a limit switch of the primary valve connected at the input BI13 or to RüF1. Either the open ('Active when BI =' Off) or closed binary input BI13 ('Active when BI =' ON)
can be configured to indicate that the creep feed rate has fallen below a certain level. Only
the closed binary input at RüF1 can be processed. Shortly after the alert, the controller closes
the valve RK1. As soon as the flow temperature falls below the set point by more than 5 °C
after the valve has been closed, control operation is started again.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Creep feed rate limitation 1)

0
BinaryON

CO5 -> F12 - 1
Switching mode: Binary (terminals 13/19), analog (RüF1)
Active when BI = ON, OFF1)

Not in system Anl 1.9

16.4.15 Device bus
The device bus allows the connection of up to 32 participants (Series 55xx Controllers). Terminals 29/30 is used in the TROVIS 5578 Controller for this purpose. No attention must be
paid to the polarity of the device bus wiring.
Activate the device bus and specify a valid device bus address between 1 and 32 for eachdevice. Note that the device bus address 1 is to be set for just one controller in the systemand that all device bus addresses must be unique. The controller with device bus address 1
implements the required bus bias voltage for the system. Once the controllers have been con-16-222EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)nected and set accordingly, additional functions can be configured. These partly application-specific functions include:− Requesting and processing an external demand (see section 16.4.15.1)− Sending and receiving outdoor temperatures (see section 16.4.15.2)− Synchronizing the clock (see section 16.4.15.3)− Priority over all controllers (see section 16.4.15.4)− Display error messages issued by the device bus (see section 16.4.15.5)

16.4.15.1 Requesting and processing an external demand
In general, the controller which controls the primary valve or boiler (= primary controller) ina system of linked controllers will process the demand of all subsequent controllers (= secondary controllers). As a result, the primary controller must be configured to receive this demand. Usually, the secondary controllers are configured such that they send their maximum
flow set point to the primary controller.
In special cases, however, it might happen that only the set point of one control circuit is tobe sent. The appropriate function blocks to do so are also available for selection. After theselected function blocks have been activated, you must specify a register number. The following applies: in a system of linked controllers which are hydraulically supplied by a primarycontroller, all controllers (primary and secondary controllers) must have the same register
number setting for the 'Demand register'.
A controller which is configured to receive a demand in register no. 5 will not process a demand sent to register no. 6. The primary controller compares the received requested demands and its own requested demand and supplies the system with the required flow temperature (if necessary, increased by the 'Set point boost (pre-control circuit)'.
Note
Overheating may occur in the heating circuits of the primary controller without control valve.
Primary controller:
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Device bus

0

CO7 -> F01 - 1, device bus address

Receive external demand in RK1

0

CO7 -> F15 - 1 1)

Receive external demand in RK2

0

CO7 -> F17 - 1 1)

Receive external demand in RK3

0

CO7 -> F18 - 1 1)

EB 5578 EN

16-223

Annex A (configuration instructions)

FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Demand only00
0

CO1 -> F24 - 1
CO2 -> F24 - 1
CO3 -> F24 - 1

51)

Parameters

Default

Parameters: value range

Set point boost (pre-control circuit)

5.0 °C

PA1, 2, 3 -> P15: 0.0 to 50.0 °C

FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Device bus

0

CO7 -> F01 - 1, device bus address

Send demand RK1

0

CO7 -> F10 - 1 1)

Send demand RK2

0

CO7 -> F11 - 1 1)

Send demand RK3

0

CO7 -> F12 - 1 1)

Send demand DHW

0

CO7 -> F13 - 1 1)

Send max. demand0

CO7 -> F14 - 1 1)

5

1)

Register number/5 to 64

Secondary controller:

Register number/5 to 64

Note
The register number specifies the location where the flow set points are saved in the primarycontroller. As a result, the register number set in the secondary controller in CO7 -> F10 toF14 must be the same as the register number set in CO7 -> F15 in the primary controller.
Excessive charging temperatures in DHW circuits without control valve controlled by the primary controller are excluded when the default settings of the controller are used: while storage tank charging is active, no flow temperature higher than the charging temperature isused by the primary controller. Nevertheless, if the Priority for external demand function is
activated, the external demand is also processed during storage tank charging.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Priority for external demand0

CO4 -> F16 - 1

16-224

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)16.4.15.2 Sending and receiving outdoor temperatures
Controllers equipped with one (two) outdoor sensor(s) can be configured to supply other controllers with the measured outdoor temperature(s) over the device bus. This enables outdoor-temperature-compensated control even in systems which do not have their own outdoor
sensor.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Device bus

0

CO7 -> F01 - 1, device bus address

Send AF1

0

CO7 -> F06 - 1 1)

Receive AF1

0

CO7 -> F07 - 1 1)

Send AF2

0

CO7 -> F08 - 1 2)

Receive AF20

CO7 -> F09 - 1 2)

1

1)

Register number/1 to 4

2

2)

Register number/1 to 4

Note
The register number for the outdoor temperature AF1 or AF2 must be the same for the sending and the receiving controller.

16.4.15.3 Synchronizing the clock
One controller in a system of linked controllers should perform the 'Clock synchronization'function. This controller sends its system time once every 24 hours to all other controllers overthe device bus.
Regardless of this function, the system time of all controllers is adapted immediately when thetime setting of one controller is changed.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Device bus

0

CO7 -> F01 - 1, device bus address

Clock synchronization

0

CO7 -> F02 - 1

EB 5578 EN

16-225

Annex A (configuration instructions)16.4.15.4 Priority over all controllers
When controllers are linked with each other over a device bus, the heating circuits of othercontrollers can be shut down while DHW heating is active. It is also possible to configure thereturn flow temperature limitation in the primary circuit so that it is raised to the value adjusted for the maximum return flow temperature (or for point 1 of the return flow temperature ina four-point characteristic). Controllers configured to trigger this function must generate the'DHW heating active' message. 'Receive release RK_' must be configured for the heating circuits concerned in the controllers whose heating circuit(s) are to be shut down when thisDHW heating is active. The same register number must be specified if only one DHW circuit
is to affect one or more heating circuits. If several DHW circuits exist in the system, it is possible to select the heating circuits that are only to react to one or other active DHW heating byassigning different register numbers. If a secondary heating circuit with valve is to be shut
down, the valve of this circuit is closed while its circulation pump remains activated.
If a secondary heating circuit without valve is to shut down, just its circulation pump and not
the primary circuit (RK1) is shut down, for example in systems Anl 2.x by configuring 'Receive release RK1'.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Device bus

0

CO7 -> F01 - 1, device bus address

Send 'DHW heating active'

0

CO7 -> F20 - 1 1)

Receive release RK1

0

CO7 -> F21 - 1 1)

Receive release RK20

CO7 -> F22 - 1 1)

Receive release RK30

CO7 -> F23 - 1 1)

32

1)Register number/5 to 64

16.4.15.5 Display error messages issued by the device bus
The setting CO7 -> F16 - 1 causes the controller to react to the error messages from the device bus by generating the 'External err' error message as long as the faults of the other device bus participants exist.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Receive errors

0

CO7 -> F16 - 1

16-226

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)16.4.16 Activating TROVIS I/O expansion modules
The function blocks F31 to F33 allows one additional heating circuit to be added to a system.
One TROVIS I/O expansion module is required per heating circuit. The CO7 -> F31 - 1 setting activates the expansion module for heating circuit 11, CO7 -> F32 - 1 activates the expansion module for heating circuit 12 and CO7 -> F33 activates the expansion module forheating circuit 13 as well as all the associated levels and settings in the controller. Dependingon which kind of communication is used, the additionally configured heating circuit works either in the primary circuit, i.e. parallel to the control circuit 1 of the configured main system,
or linked to the control circuit 1 (HC1) of the configured main system. As a result, two newplant schemes can be configured per TROVIS I/O module for each main system. Heating circuits connected to HC1 automatically send their flow temperature demand to HC1.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Ext-HC11

0
11
To HC1

CO7 -> F31 - 1:
TROVIS I/O for heating circuit 11 active
Device bus address: 11 to 19
Connected/primary circuit, to HC1

Ext-HC120
12
To HC1

CO7 -> F32 - 1:
TROVIS I/O for heating circuit 12 active
Device bus address: 11 to 19
Connected/primary circuit, to HC1

Ext-HC13

0
13
To HC1

CO7 -> F33 - 1:
TROVIS I/O for heating circuit 13 active
Device bus address: 11 to 19
Connected/primary circuit, to HC1

Note
The default setting for the device bus address (33) must be changed in C07 -> F01 - 1 whenan extension module is used (see section 16.4.15).

EB 5578 EN

16-227

Annex A (configuration instructions)16.4.17 Connecting potentiometers for valve position input
The FG1 to FG3 inputs can be used to connect potentiometers, for example to input valve positions when a resistance room sensor is not configured in the control circuit concerned. The
use of TROVIS 5570 Room Panel is possible. The measured values (in the measuring ranges
from 0 to 2000 Ω) are displayed as measured value 13 (FG1), 14 (FG2) and 15 (FG3).
They are also available as Modbus data points.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration
CO1, 2, 3 -> F01 - 0

Room sensor RF1, 2, 3

Exceptions:
CO1 ->F01 - 1 and CO7 ->F03 - 1
CO2 ->F01 - 1 and CO7 ->F04 - 1
0

CO3 ->F01 - 1 and CO7 ->F05 - 1

16.4.18 Locking manual level
To protect the heating system, this function can be used to lock the manual level. When thisfunction has been activated, automatic mode is started when the rotary switch is set to in automatic mode.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Lock manual level0

CO5 -> F21 - 1

16.4.19 Locking the rotary switch
When this function has been activated, the controller remains in automatic mode regardlessof the rotary switch position. The rotary switch can no longer be used to adjust the controller
settings. It is still possible to enter the key number.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Lock rotary switch

0

CO5 -> F22 - 1

16.4.20 Feeder pump operation
In system Anl 3.0, 5.0, 7.x, 9.1, 9.2, 12.x, 15.1, 16.1, 16.5, 16.7 and 16.8, the feeder
pump UP1 only starts to operate in the default setting when a flow temperature demand of asecondary controller exists. If CO5 -> F14 - 1 is configured, this is also the case when thecontroller's own secondary circuit requires heat.

16-228EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

FunctionsDefault

Configuration

0

CO5 -> F14 - 1

Operation UP1

16.4.21 Speed control of the circulation pump (DHW)The delivery rate of the circulation pump (DHW) can be controlled based on the circulation
return flow temperature. The CO4 -> F25 - 1 setting makes the outputs AA1 (0 to 10 V) andAA2 (PWM) available to issue the speed signal. The output signal can also be reversed, if required. The input RüF4/AF2 is used to measure the circulation return flow temperature.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Speed control of circulation pump (DHW) 0

CO4 -> F25 - 1

Return flow temperature of circulation
pump (DHW) Target

55 °C

5 to 90 °C

KP (gain)

1.0

0.1 to 50

Tn (reset time)

300 s

30 to 2000 s

Minimum speed

10 %5 to 50 %AA1, AA2 reverse

0

CO5 -> F25, F26 - 1
Zero: 0 to 50 %AA1, AA2 PWM

0

CO5 -> F34, F35 - 1
Function: ZP speed

16.4.22 External demand for heat due to insufficient heat supply
An external heat source can be demanded using the 0 to 10 V output. The function block fora request for external demand CO1 -> F18 - 1 is automatically set. The function block parameters allow the transmission range to be determined. When a system deviation in RK1
greater than 10 °C lasts longer than 30 minutes, a voltage signal corresponding to the actual
demand is issued. At the same time, the RK1 valve is forced to close. After 30 minutes, theexternal demand for heat is canceled and the control signal output in RK1 is enabled again.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Demand for external heat0

CO1 -> F20 - 1

External demand

0
0.0 °C
120.0 °C
0.0 °C

CO1 -> F18 - 1
Lower transmission range: 0.0 to 150.0 °C
Upper transmission range: 0.0 to 150.0 °C
Boost: 0.0 to 30.0 °C

AA1 PWM

0

CO5 -> F34 - 0
Function: external demand

EB 5578 EN

16-229Annex A (configuration instructions)16.5 Communication
16.5.1 RS-485 communication module
When looking onto the controller front, the connection for the optional communication module RS-485 (order no. 8812-2002) is located on the left side of the controller housing (RJ-45
port). The bus line links the control units/devices in an open ring. At the end of the bus line,
the data cable is connected to the control station using an RS-485/RS-232 converter (e.g.
CoRe02, see Data Sheet u T 5409).
The maximum range of the bus connection (cable length) is 1200 meters. For greater distances, repeaters (e.g. CoRe02) must be used to regenerate the signal level. A maximum of 246
devices with 8-bit addressing can be connected to a bus. If no communication is establishedbetween the control system and controller, the time of access by the control system can be restricted to dynamic process by the monitoring function. The controller resets the monitoring
function, provided the valid Modbus requests are registered. However, in case of an error, alllevel bits are initialized back to “autonomous” after 30 minutes have elapsed.
! NOTICE
Risk of fatal injury due to electric shock.
Î Upon installation, observe the relevant standards and regulations governing lightningand overvoltage protection.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Modbus1

CO6 -> F01 - 1

16-bit address

0

CO6 -> F02

Monitoring

0

CO6 -> F07

Parameters

Default

Parameters: value range

Modbus station address (8 bit)255

PA6 -> P01: 1 to 246
with CO6 -> F02 - 1: 1 to 32000

Communication parameter settings− Modbus station address (8 bit)
This address is used to identify the controller in bus or modem mode. In a system, eachcontroller needs to be assigned a unique address.

16-230EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)16.5.2 Meter bus
The TROVIS 5578 Controller is fitted with an M-Bus interface for max. three M-Bus units. For
systems with three control circuits, a flow rate and/or capacity limitation can be be configured in every control circuit based on the measured data of the heat meters HM 1 to HM 3.
Note
Details on the use of the different heat or water meters can be found in the technical documentation TV-SK 4000179038.

16.5.2.1 Activating the meter bus
To successfully transfer data from the heat meter, the heat meter must use a standardized protocol in accordance with EN 1434-3. It is not possible to make a general statement about
which specific data can be accessed in each meter. For details on the different meter makes
refer to the technical documentation TV-SK 6311. All necessary function block parameters to
set up the communication with heat meters are available in CO6 -> F10. The meter bus address, model code and reading mode must be specified for the heat meters HM 1 to HM 3. A
meter bus address must be unique and correspond with the address set in the heat meter. If
the preset meter bus address is unknown, a single heat meter connected to the controller canbe assigned the meter bus address 254. The address 255 deactivates the communication
with the respective heat meter. The model code to be set for the heat meter can be found in
TV-SK 4000179038. In general, the default setting of 1434 can be used for most devices.
The meters can be read either automatically every 24 hours (approx.), continuously or when
the coils (= Modbus data points) assigned to the heat meters 1 to 3 are overwritten with thevalue 1 over the system bus interface.
The additional "meter" page is displayed with connection
status for meters 1 to 3 in the "extended operating level"
mode when the meter bus is activated. When 'Connected'
status is displayed, the following data for each meter can beread by pressing the rotary pushbutton:

EB 5578 EN

16-231

Annex A (configuration instructions)

−
−
−
−
−

Flow rate
VolumeCapacity
EnergyFlow temperature (Flow)− Return flow temperature (Return flow)− Meter ID (ID no.)− Meter bus address (Address, sent by meter)

FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Meter bus

0

CO6 -> F10 - 1

255

HM 1...3 address: 0 to 255

1434

HM1...3 model: 1434, Multical3, Apator, SLS/WSF

Continuous HM1...3 mode: 24 h, Continuous, Coil
Tar-A

Tariff: Tar-A, Tar-E (tariff schedule ON, OFF; only for HM1
with '1434' and 'Continuous' settings)
Tar-E: the consumption data are assigned to a high tariff
or a low tariff depending on the time schedule programmed in the customer level. Three time periods can beentered per day of the week (not vacations or public holidays):
1–7 daily, 1 = Monday, 2 = Tuesday, …, 7 = Sunday

16.5.2.2 Flow rate and/or capacity limitation with meter bus
The refreshing rate of the measured variable (flow rate and/or capacity) must be less thanfives seconds to ensure that the limitation can be performed properly. The technical documentation TV-SK 6311 lists the heat meters which comply with this criterion and, therefore
can be used for limitation. Note that some makes, particularly battery-operated heat meters,
respond with communication pauses when they are read too frequently. Others might run outof energy early. For details refer to the above mentioned TV-SK document.
− A system with simultaneous room and DHW heating requires maximum energy.

16-232EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)− A system with a fully charged storage tank that is only used for room heating requires
less energy.
− A system that suspends room heating during DHW heating requires less energy.
As a result, three different maximum limit values for RK1 can be adjusted in all systems with
only one control valve and DHW heating on the secondary side:− Max. limit value to determine the absolute upper limit− Max. limit value for heating to operate room heating only
− Max. limit value for DHW to operate DHW heating only
If the 'Max. limit' or 'Max. limit (heating)' parameter for HC1 is set to 'OT', a four-point
characteristic configured in CO1 -> F11 - 1 allows the input of four flow rate or capacity limits for outdoor-temperature-compensated flow rate or capacity limitation in addition to the
outdoor, flow and return flow temperature values.
In all systems with two or three control valves, separate maximum limits can be adjusted forthe flow rate and capacity.
Flow limitation
All necessary function block parameters to set up the flow rate limitation are available in
CO6 -> F11 or CO6 -> F13 and CO6 -> F15 for the second and third control circuit. One
after the other, the system's max. limit or max. limit for heating and the max. limit for DHW
for systems with only one primary control valve and secondary DHW heating have to be set.
The 'Limiting factor' determines how strongly the controller responds when the limit values
are exceeded in either direction.
When the flow rate limitation is activated, the respective measuring and limit values are displayed in the extended operating level after confirming the plant scheme.
Note
If the controller indicates CO5 -> F00 - 1, any access to the return flow, flow rate and capacity settings is locked.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Meter bus

0

CO6 -> F10 - 1

255

HM 1...3 address: 0 to 255

1434

HM 1...3 model: 1434, CAL3, APAtO, SLS

Continuous HM1...3 mode: 24 h, Continuous, CoiLEB 5578 EN

16-233

Annex A (configuration instructions)

FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Flow rate limitation in RK1

0

CO6 -> F11 - 1

1.5 m³/hMax. limit: OT to 650 m³/h

1.5 m³/hMax. limit (heating): OT to 650 m³/h

1.5 m³/hMax. limit (DHW): 0.01 to 650 m³/h

1.0

Limiting factor: 0.1 to 10.00

CO6 -> F13 - 1

1.5

Max. limit: 0.01 to 650 m³/h

1.0

Limiting factor: 0.1 to 10.00

CO6 -> F15- 1

1.5

Max. limit: 0.01 to 650 m³/h

1.0

Limiting factor: 0.1 to 10.0

Flow rate limitation in RK2

Flow rate limitation in RK3

Capacity limitation
All necessary function block parameters to set up the capacity limitation are available in
CO6 -> F12, CO6 -> F14 and CO6 -> F16 for the second and third control circuit. One
after the other, the system's max. limit or max. limit for heating and the max. limit for DHW
for systems with only one primary control valve and secondary DHW heating have to be set.
The 'Limiting factor' determines how strongly the controller responds when the limit values
are exceeded in either direction.
When the capacity limitation is activated, the respective measuring and limit values are displayed in the extended operating level after confirming the plant scheme.
Note
If the controller indicates CO5 -> F00 - 1, any access to the return flow, flow rate and capacity settings is locked.
FunctionsDefault

Meter bus

0
255
1434
24h

16-234

Configuration
CO6 -> F10 - 1
HM 1...3 address: 0 to 255
HM 1...3 model: 1434, CAL3, APAtO, SLS
HM1...3 mode: 24 h, Continuous, CoiLEB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

FunctionsDefault

Configuration

Capacity limitation in RK1

0

CO6 -> F12 - 1

1.5 kW

Max. limit: OT to 6500 kW

1.5 kW

Max. limit (heating): OT to 6500 kW

1.5 kW

Max. limit (DHW): 0.1 to 6500 kW

1.0

Limiting factor: 0.1 to 10.00

CO6 -> F14 - 1

1.5 kW

Max. limit: 0.1 to 6500 kW

1.0

Limiting factor: 0.1 to 10.00

CO6 -> F16 - 1

1.5 kW

Max. limit: 0.1 to 6500 kW

1.0

Limiting factor: 0.1 to 10.0

Capacity limitation in RK2

Capacity limitation in RK3

16.5.3 Return flow temperature limitation based on capacity
A capacity limit can be determined for control circuit based on the measured capacity valueof the heat meter 1 (HM1). The return flow temperature in control circuit 1 is limited according the settings entered in PA1 as long as the measured capacity value is below the determined capacity limit. When the measured capacity value exceeds the capacity limit, a return
flow temperature limit adjustable separately for control circuit 1 takes effect.
FunctionsDefault

Configuration

RK1
Return flow temperature limitation based on capacity0

CO6 -> F17 - 1: new maximum return flow limit at a capacity higher than the max. limit(only when CO6 -> F10 - 1 and activated HM1)

1.5 kW

Max. limit: 0.1 to 6500 kW

55 °C

Max. return flow temperature: 5.0 to 90.0 °C

16.5.4 Memory module/mini module
The use of a memory module (order no. 1400-9379) or mini module (order no. 1400-7436)
is particularly useful to transfer all data from one TROVIS 5578 Controller to several other
TROVIS 5578 Controllers.

EB 5578 EN

16-235

Annex A (configuration instructions)

Note
In contrast to the memory module, the mini module is not suitable for transferring the programmed vacations to the individual control circuits or a data logging configuration programmed in TROVIS-VIEW.
The memory module/mini module is plugged into the RJ45 connector socket located at the side of the controller.
Once the module has been connected, 'Save settings' appears on the controller display. If the memory module already contains data from a different TROVIS 5578 Controller, turn the rotary pushbutton until 'Load settings' isdisplayed.
− Pressing the rotary pushbutton to confirm 'Save settings' causes the controller settings to be transferred tothe memory module/mini module.
− Pressing the rotary pushbutton to confirm 'Load settings' causes the controller settings to be transferredfrom the memory module/mini module.
During data transfer, the zeros and ones run across thedisplay. When the transfer was successful, 'OK' is displayed. After that, the connection between controller andmemory module can be terminated.

16-236

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

Using TROVIS-VIEW (order no. 6661-1014), it is possible to configure all controller settings
on a convenient user interface at the computer and to document these settings.

16.5.5 Data logging
A data logging module (order no. 1400-9378) saves the following controller data every two
minutes:− Temperatures measured by the sensors− Control signals in %− Switching states of the pump outputs
The data logging module is plugged into the RJ-45 connector socket located at the side of the controller. Once themodule has been connected, 'Start data logging' and 'Copy logging data' appear on the controller display.
− Pressing the rotary pushbutton to confirm 'Start data
logging' causes the above listed operating values to be
saved cyclically to the inserted data logging module.
The controller display returns to the reading indicatedwhen the data logging module was connected.
− Pressing the rotary pushbutton to confirm 'Copy logging data' causes already logged data to be transferred from the memory controller to the data logging
module. During data transfer, the zeros and ones run
across the display. When the transfer was successful,'OK' is displayed. After that, the connection between
controller and data logging module can be terminated.

EB 5578 EN

16-237

Annex A (configuration instructions)

Note− The controller starts to write over the oldest data as soon the memory of the data logging
module is full after approximately eight days. The current memory capacity of the data logging module can be read in the extended operating level under 'Logging memory' as thesecond value in the sequence (range of values: 0 to 6035). Directly after inserting the data
logging module, data can be first read after the first scanning cycle has been performed.
− The oldest data in the internal memory of the controller are overwritten after approx. 14
days. The cycle time is one minute.
The data log viewer software allows the data to be viewed in graph format. The USB converter 3 (order no. 1400-9377) is required to connect the data logging module to a computer.
The data log viewer software is supplied together with the USB converter 3.

16-238EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)16.6 Function block lists
CO1: RK1 · Heating circuit 1 (not system Anl 1.9) 1)F

WE

01 Room sensor

0

Not systems CO1 -> F01 - 1: Room sensor RF1, temperature reading and
Anl 1.5–
FG1 input for Types 5244, 5257-5 and 5257-51 Room Panels
1.8, 3.x,
active5.x, 7.x,
9.x, 12.x,
14.x, 15.x,
16.x, 17.x,
18.x

02 Outdoor
sensor0

1.5–1.8,
3.5, 7.x,
10.5, 25.51

1.0–1.3, 2.x,
3.0–3.4, 3.9,
4.x–9.x,
10.0–10.3,
11.x–16.x,
17.x, 18.x,
21.x, 25.00

1.1–1.4,
10.1–10.3,
21.1

03 Return flow
sensorAnlComments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)

Function

CO1 -> F02 - 1: Outdoor sensor AF1, outdoor-temperature-compensated control active

CO1 -> F03 - 1: Return flow sensor RüF1; limitation function
activeFunction block parameters:
1 1.0, 1.5, 1.6– KP (limiting factor): 0.1 to 10.0 (1.0)
1.8, 2.x–9.x,
10.0, 10.5,
11.x– 16.x,
17.x, 18.x,
21.0, 21.2,
21.9, 25.x

04 Cooling
controlEB 5578 EN

0

Not systems
Anl 1.9,
3.9, 5.9,
16.x, 17.x,
18.x

CO1 -> F04 - 1: Cooling control, only with CO1 -> F11 - 1
The cooling control function causes a reversal of the operating
direction and a minimum limitation of the return flow temperature in RK1.

16-239Annex A (configuration instructions)

F

Function

WE

05 Underfloor
heating0

AnlComments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)

Not systems CO1 -> F05 - 1: Underfloor heating/drying of jointless floors
Anl 1.5–1.8,
Function block parameters:
3.x, 5.0–5.2, Boost: 0.0 to 50.0 °C (0.0 °C)
7.x, 9.x,
Start temperature: 20.0 to 60.0 °C (25 °C)
12.x, 14.x,
Hold (days): 0 to 10 days (0 days)
15.x, 16.x,
Temp. rise/day: 0.0 to 20.0 °C (5.0 °C)
17.x, 18.x

Maximum temperature: 25.0 to 60.0 °C (45.0 °C)
Hold (days): 0 to 30 days (4 days)
Temp. reduction/day: 0.0 to 20.0 °C (0.0 °C)
Start condition: Stop, Start, Hold, Reduction

06 Storage tanksensor SF2

1

Systems Anl CO1 -> F06 - 1: Activate SF2 to switch off charging of the buf3.9, 5.9,
fer tank
16.x, 17.x,
18.x only

07 Optimization

0

08 Adaptation

0

09 Flashadaptation0

Not systems CO1 -> F07 - 1: Optimization of heating times
Anl 1.5–1.8, (only when CO1 > F01 - 1 and CO1 -> F02 - 1)
3.x, 5.x, 7.x,
CO1 -> F08 - 1: Heating characteristic adaptation
9.x, 12.x,
14.x, 15.x, (only when CO1 -> F01 - 1, CO1 -> F02 - 1 and CO1 ->16.x, 17.x, F11 - 0)
18.x
CO1 -> F09 - 1: Flash adaptation of flow temperature

11 Four-point
characteristic0

Not Anl
1.5–1.8,
7.x

CO1 -> F11 - 1: Four-point characteristic (only when
CO1 -> F08 - 0)
CO1 -> F11 - 0: Gradient characteristic

12 Three-step
control mode1

All 1)

CO1 -> F12 - 1: Three-step control
Function block parameters:
KP (gain): 0.1 to 50.0 (2.0)
Tn (reset time): 1 to 999 s (120 s)
TV (derivative-action time): 0 to 999 s (0 s)
TY (valve transit time): 15, 20, 25, …, 240 s (35 s)(only when CO1 -> F01 - 1)
Function block parameters:
Cycle time: 0 or 1 to 100 min (20 min)
KP (gain): 0.0 to 25.0 (0.0)

CO1 -> F12 - 0: On/off control
Function block parameters:
Hysteresis: 1.0 to 30.0 °C (5.0 °C)
Min. ON time: 0 to 10 min (2 min)Min. OFF time: 0 to 10 min (2 min)16-240EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)F

Comments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)

Function

WE

Anl

13 Damping0

All 1)

CO1 -> F13 - 1: OPEN signal damping (only when CO1 ->F12 - 1)
Function block parameters:
Max. system deviation: 3.0 to 10.0 °C (3.0 °C)

14 Release0

All 1)

CO1 -> F14 - 1: Release RK1 at BI15; FG1 has no function
Function block parameters:
Active when BI = ON, OFF (ON)16 Demandprocessing,
0 to 10 V
Input
Terminals
19/23

0

All 1)

CO1 -> F16 - 1: Demand processing, 0 to 10 V

17 Binarydemandprocessing

0

18 External
demand0

All 1)

CO1 -> F18 - 1: External demand 0 to 10 V
The standardized signal output (terminals 20/21) is not available anymore as a control output. The maximum flow set point(with boost, if applicable) is demanded as a 0 to 10 V signal at
the standardized signal output.
Function block parameters:
Lower transmission range: 0.0 to 150.0 °C (0.0 °C)
Upper transmission range: 0.0 to 150.0 °C (120.0 °C)
Boost: 0.0 to 30.0 °C (0.0 °C)

20 Demand forexternal heat0

All 1)

CO1 -> F20 - 1: External demand for heat due to insufficientheat supply

21 Speed controlof thechargingpump

0

22 SLP
depending on
return flow
temperature0

EB 5578 EN

Not for sys- CO1 -> F17 - 1: Binary demand processing at input terminals
tems with 17/18
SF3
Function block parameters:

Active when BI = OFF, ON (ON)

Systems Anl CO1 -> F21 - 1: Temperature-based adaptation of the delivery
3.9, 5.9,rate of the charging pump
16.x, 17.x, The output is determined in the CO5 -> F34 or F35 setting with
18.x only

the 'SLP speed' function.
Function block parameters:
Start speed reduction, limit: 5.0 to 90.0 °C (40.0 °C)
Stop speed reduction, limit: 5.0 to 90.0 °C (50.0 °C)
Minimum speed: 0 to 50 % (20 %)Systems Anl CO1 -> F22 - 1: Storage tank charging pump not ON unless
3.9, 5.9,
return flow hot
16.x, 17.x,
18.x only

16-241

Annex A (configuration instructions)F

Comments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)

Function

WE

Anl

23 Differential
temperature
control0

System Anl
1.0, 16.0
only

CO1 -> F23 - 1: Activation of differential temperature control
The output is determined in the CO5 -> F34 or F35 setting withthe 'Differential temperature control' function.
Function block parameters:
Set point of differential temperature control: 0.0 to 50.0 °C(20.0 °C)
KP (influence factor): 0.1 to 10.0 (1.0)
Minimum speed: 0 to 100 % (20 %)24 Demand only0

All 1)

CO1 -> F24 - 1: RK1 works as a feeder circuit. RK1 only processes external demand for heating; UP1 runs depending on
demand.

25 Buffer tankbottom sensor

0

3.9,5.9,
16.x, 17.x,
18.x

CO1 -> F25 - 1: Buffer tank bottom sensor SF3 active
Function block parameters:
Temperature limit: 0.0 to 50.0 °C (10 °C)

26 SLP
temperature
sensor0

3.9, 5.9,
16.x, 17.x,
18.x

CO1 -> F26 - 1: Different sensor for the speed control of thecharging pump
Function block parameters:
Sensor: AF1 to SF3 (RüF2)

27 Discharging
protection

0

3.9, 5.9,
CO1 -> F27 - 1: discharging protection active
15.4, 15.5,
16.x, 17.x,
18.x

28 Variable night
set-back

0

Not systems CO1 -> F28 - 1: variable night set-backAnl 1.5,(only when CO1 -> F11 - 0)
1.6, 1.7,
Function block parameters:
1.8, 3.x,
OTL night 100 %: –50.0 to 20.0 °C (5.0 °C)
5.x, 7.x,
OTL day 0 %: –50.0 to 5.0 °C (–15.0 °C)
9.1, 9.2,
10.5, 12.x,
14.x, 15.x,
16.x, 17.x,
18.x, 25.5

F Function block number, WE Default setting, Anl System code number

16-242EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

CO2: RK2 · Heating circuit 2(systems Anl 3.1–3.4, 3.9, 4.x, 5.x, 6.0, 10.x, 16.1, 16.6, 16.8, 17.x, 18.x, 25.0, 25.5) 1)
F

Comments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)

Function

WE

Anl

01 Room sensor0

All 1)

CO2 -> F01 - 1: Room sensor RF2, temperature reading andFG2 input for Types 5244, 5257-5 and 5257-51 Room Panels
active02 Outdoor
sensor0

All 1)

CO2 -> F02 - 1: with outdoor sensor, outdoor-temperature-compensated control active
Function block parameters:
Select AF1, AF2

03 Return flow
sensor0
1

04 Cooling
control

005 Underfloor
heating

4.x–5.2, 6.x, CO2 -> F03 - 1: Return flow sensor RüF2; limitation function
10.1–10.3, active
16.x
Function block parameters:
3.0–3.5,
10.0, 10.5,
25.x

KP (limiting factor): 0.1 to 10.0 (1.0)

Not systems CO2 -> F04 - 1: Cooling control
Anl 3.9,
The cooling control function causes a reversal of the operating
5.9, 16.x, direction and a minimum limitation of the return flow tempera17.x, 18.x

ture in RK2.

0

All 1)

CO2 -> F05 - 1: Underfloor heating/drying of jointless floors
Function block parameters:
Boost: 0.0 to 50.0 °C (0.0 °C)
Start temperature: 20 to 60 °C (25 °C)
Hold (days): 0 to 10 days (0 days)
Temp. rise/day: 0.0 to 20.0 °C (5.0 °C)
Maximum temperature: 25.0 to 60.0 °C (45.0 °C)
Hold (days): 0 to 30 days (4 days)
Temp. reduction/day: 0.0 to 20.0 °C (0.0 °C)
Start condition: Stop, Start, Hold, Reduction

07 Optimization0

All 1)

CO2 -> F07 - 1: Optimization of heating times(only when CO2 > F01 - 1 and CO1(2) -> F02 - 1)

08 Adaptation0

All 1)

CO2 -> F08 - 1: Heating characteristic adaptation(only when CO2 -> F01 - 1, CO1(2) -> F02 - 1 and CO2 ->F11 - 0)09 Flashadaptation0

All 1)

CO2 -> F09 - 1: Flash adaptation of flow temperature(only when CO2 -> F01 - 1)
Function block parameters:
Cycle time: 0 or 1 to 100 min (20 min)
KP (gain): 0.0 to 25.0 (0.0)

EB 5578 EN

16-243

Annex A (configuration instructions)F

Comments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)

Function

WE

Anl

11 Four-point
characteristic0

All 1)

CO2 -> F11 - 1: Four-point characteristic (only when
CO2 -> F08 - 0)
CO2 -> F11 - 0: Gradient characteristic

12 Three-step
control mode1

All 1)

CO2 -> F12 - 1: Three-step control
Function block parameters:
KP (gain): 0.1 to 50.0 (2.0)
Tn (reset time): 1 to 999 s (120 s)
TV (derivative-action time): 0 to 999 s (0 s)
TY (valve transit time): 15, 20, 25, …, 240 s (35 s)
CO2 -> F12 - 0: On/off control
Function block parameters:
Hysteresis: 1.0 to 30.0 °C (5.0 °C)
Min. ON time: 0 to 10 min (2 min)Min. OFF time: 0 to 10 min (2 min)

13 Damping0

All 1)

CO2 -> F13 - 1: OPEN signal damping (only when CO2 ->F12 - 1)
Function block parameters:
Max. system deviation: 3.0 to 10.0 °C (3.0 °C)

14 Release0

All 1)

CO2 -> F14 - 1: Release RK2 at BI16; FG2 has no function
Function block parameters:
Active when BI = ON, OFF (ON)16 Demandprocessing,
0 to 10 V
Input
Terminals
19/23

0

All 1)

CO2 -> F16 - 1: Demand processing in RK2

24 Demand only0

All 1)

CO2 -> F24 - 1: RK2 works as a feeder circuit. RK2 only processes external demand for heating; UP2 runs depending on
demand.

28 Variable night
set-back0

Not Anl
3.5, 10.5,
25.5

CO2 -> F28 - 1: variable night set-back(only when CO2 -> F11 - 0)
Function block parameters:
OTL night 100 %: –50.0 to +20.0 °C (5.0 °C)
OTL day 0 %: –50.0 to +5.0 °C (–15.0 °C)

F Function block number, WE Default setting, Anl System code number

16-244

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

CO3: RK3 · Heating circuit 3(systems Anl 3.9, 5.x, 6.x, 9.x, 12.x, 13.x, 15.x, 16.5, 16.7, 16.8, 17.x, 21.x, 25.x) 1)
F

Comments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)

Function

WE

Anl

01 Room sensor0

All 1)

CO3 -> F01 - 1: Room sensor RF3, temperature reading andFG3 input for Types 5244, 5257-5 and 5257-51 Room Panels
active02 Outdoor
sensor1

All 1)

CO3 -> F02 - 1: with outdoor sensor, outdoor-temperature-compensated control active
Function block parameters:
Select AF1, AF2

03 Return flow
sensor0

1

21.2, 25.x

04 Cooling
control0

Not systems CO3 -> F04 - 1: Cooling control
Anl 5.9,
The cooling control function causes a reversal of the operating
15.x, 16.x, direction and a minimum limitation of the return flow tempera17.x

05 Underfloor
heating0

All 1)

CO3 -> F05 - 1: Underfloor heating/drying of jointless floors
Function block parameters:
Boost: 0.0 to 50.0 °C (0.0 °C)
Start temperature: 20 to 60 °C (25 °C)
Hold (days): 0 to 10 days (0 days)
Temp. rise/day: 0.0 to 20.0 °C (5.0 °C)
Maximum temperature: 25.0 to 60.0 °C (45.0 °C)
Hold (days): 0 to 30 days (4 days)
Temp. reduction/day: 0.0 to 20.0 °C (0.0 °C)
Start condition: Stop, Start, Hold, Reduction

07 Optimization0

All 1)

CO3 -> F07 - 1: Optimization of heating times(only when CO3 > F01 - 1 and CO1(3) -> F02 - 1)

08 Adaptation0

All 1)

CO3 -> F08 - 1: Heating characteristic adaptation(only when CO3 -> F01 - 1, CO1(3) -> F02 - 1 and CO3 ->F11 - 0)09 Flashadaptation0

All 1)

CO3 -> F09 - 1: Flash adaptation of flow temperature(only when CO3 -> F01 - 1)
Function block parameters:
Cycle time: 0 or 1 to 100 min (20 min)
KP (gain): 0.0 to 25.0 (0.0)

5.0–5.2, 6.x, CO3 -> F03 - 1: Return flow sensor RüF2; limitation function
9.x, 12.x, active
13.x, 15.x,
Function block parameters:
16.5, 16.7,
KP (limiting factor): 0.1 to 10.0 (1.0)
16.8, 21.1,
21.9

ture in RK3.

EB 5578 EN

16-245

Annex A (configuration instructions)F

Comments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)

Function

WE

Anl

11 Four-point
characteristic0

All 1)

CO3 -> F11 - 1: Four-point characteristic (only when
CO3 -> F08 - 0)
CO3 -> F11 - 0: Gradient characteristic

12 Three-step
control mode1

All 1)

CO3 -> F12 - 1: Three-step control
Function block parameters:
KP (gain): 0.1 to 50.0 (2.0)
Tn (reset time): 1 to 999 s (120 s)
TV (derivative-action time): 0 to 999 s (0 s)
TY (valve transit time): 15, 20, 25, …, 240 s (35 s)
CO3 -> F12 - 0: On/off control
Function block parameters:
Hysteresis: 1.0 to 30.0 °C (5.0 °C)
Min. ON time: 0 to 10 min (2 min)Min. OFF time: 0 to 10 min (2 min)

13 Damping

0

14 Release0

16 Demandprocessing,
0 to 10 V
Input
Terminals
19/23

0

All 1)

CO3 -> F16 - 1: Demand processing in RK3

24 Demand only0

All 1)

CO3 -> F24 - 1: RK3 works as a feeder circuit. RK3 only processes external demand for heating; UP3 runs depending on
demand.

28 Variable night
set-back0

Not Anl
25.5

All 1)

CO3 -> F13 - 1: OPEN signal damping (only when CO3 ->F12 - 1)
Function block parameters:
Max. system deviation: 3.0 to 10.0 °C (3.0 °C)

Not for sys- CO3 -> F14 - 1: Release RK3 at BI17; FG3 has no function
tems with
Function block parameters:
SF3
Active when BI = ON, OFF (ON)CO3 -> F28 - 1: variable night set-back(only when CO3 -> F11 - 0)
Function block parameters:
OTL night 100 %: –50.0 to +20.0 °C (5.0 °C)
OTL day 0 %: –50.0 to +5.0 °C (–15.0 °C)

F Function block number, WE Default setting, Anl System code number

16-246

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)CO4: DHW circuit (systems Anl 1.1–1.9, 2.x, 3.1–3.4, 3.9, 4.1–4.5, 5.1, 5.2, 7.x, 8.x,
9.x, 10.1–10.3, 11.x, 12.x, 13.x, 14.x, 15.x, 17.x, 18.x, 21.x) 1)
F

Function

WE

Anl

01 Storage tanksensor SF1
Not systems
Anl 3.9, 5.9,
11.0, 11.3,
11.5, 12.0,
13.0, 17.x,
18.x, 21.0

1

1)

0

2)

02 Storage tanksensor SF2
Not Anl 1.9,
11.0, 11.3,
11.9, 12.0,
12.9, 13.0,
13.9, 14.3,
15.3, 21.0,
21.9

03 Return flow
sensor RüF2

Comments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)
CO4 -> F01 - 1: Storage tank sensor SF1
CO4 -> F01 - 0: Storage tank thermostat(only when CO4 -> F02 - 0)
1)

2)

0

1)

1

2)

CO4 -> F02 - 1: Storage tank sensor SF2(only when CO4 -> F01 - 1)
1)

2)

0

Default = 1: Systems Anl 1.1–1.8, 2.x, 3.1–3.4, 4.1–4.5, 5.1, 5.2,
7.x–9.x, 10.1–10.3, 11.1, 11.2, 11.4, 11.6, 12.1, 13.1, 13.2,
14.x, 15.x, 21.1, 21.2
Default = 0: Systems Anl 1.9, 11.9, 12.9, 13.9, 21.9

Default = 1: 1.1, 1.3, 1.4, 1.5, 1.7, 1.8-2, 2.0, 2.1, 3.1, 3.3, 3.4,
4.1, 4.3, 4.5, 5.1, 7.1, 8.1, 9.1, 9.5, 10.1, 10.3, 11.1, 11.4,
11.5, 11.9, 12.1, 13.1, 14.1, 15.0, 15.1, 21.1
Default = 0: 1.2, 1.6, 1.8-1, 1.8-3, 1.9, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.2, 4.2,
5.2, 7.2, 8.2, 9.2, 9.6, 10.2, 11.0, 11.2, 11.3, 11.6, 12.0, 12.2,
12.9, 13.0, 13.2, 13.9, 14.2, 14.3, 15.2, 15.3, 21.0, 21.2, 21.9

1.9, 7.x, 8.x, CO4 -> F03 - 1: Return flow sensor RüF2; limitation function
11.x, 12.x, active
13.x, 21.x
Function block parameter:

KP (limiting factor): 0.1 to 10.0 (1.0)

04 Flow rate
sensor0

3.9, 5.9,
17.x, 18.x

CO4 -> F03 - 1: return flow sensor RüF2 or RüF4 when RüF2 isactivated for HK2; output UP1 to layer the return flow dependingon the temperature active

1.9, 11.9,
12.9, 13.9,
21.9

CO4 -> F04 - 1: Flow rate sensor at BI17
Function block parameter:
Select: Analog/Binary (Analog) 1)
Analog = flow rate sensor (1400-9246)
Binary = flow switch at terminals 17/18
In systems Anl 3.9, 5.9, 17.x and 18.x, only a flow switch canbe configured.
1)

EB 5578 EN

16-247

Annex A (configuration instructions)F

Comments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)

Function

WE

Anl

05 Flow sensor

0

1.1–1.4,
1.6, 1.8,
1.9, 2.2,
2.4, 3.2,
3.4, 4.2,
5.2, 7.2,
8.2, 9.2,
9.6, 10.1–
10.3, 11.2,
11.9, 12.2,
12.9, 13.2,
13.9, 21.2,
21.9

06 Parallel pump
operation

1

8.x, 9.5, 9.6 CO4 -> F06 - 1: Parallel pump operation

0
07 Intermediate
heating10

2.1–2.4,
4.1–4.5

Function block parameters:
Stop: 0 to 10 min (10 min)Temperature limit: 20.0 to 90.0 °C (40.0 °C)

CO4 -> F06 - 0: UP1 switched off during DHW heating

CO4 -> F07 - 1: after 20 minutes of DHW heating, heating
operation in UP1 circuit reactivated for 10 minutes
8.x, 9.5, 9.6 CO4 -> F07 - 0: storage tank charging is given unlimited priority concerning UP1 circuit
2.x,
4.1–4.5

08 Priority(reverse)

009 Priority(set-back)0

10 Circulation
pump (DHW)
integrated
into heatexchanger01.6, 1.8,
3.2, 3.4,
5.2, 7.2,
9.2, 11.2,
11.4, 12.2,
13.2, 21.2

1

11.6, 13.6

16-248

CO4 -> F05 - 1: Flow sensor VF4 (to measure storage tankcharging temperature)

1.1–1.4,
3.1–3.4,
4.1–4.5,
5.1, 5.2,
9.x, 10.1–
10.3, 11.x,
12.x, 13.x,
15.0, 15.4,
15.5, 21.x

CO4 -> F08 - 1: Priority by reverse control(only when CO4 -> F09 - 0)
Function block parameters:
Start: 0 to 10 min (2 min)
KP (influence factor): 0.1 to 10.0 (1.0)
Control circuit: HC1, HC2, HC3, HC1+HC2, HC1+HC3
CO4 -> F09 - 1: Priority through set-back operation(only when CO4 -> F08 - 0)
Function block parameters:
Start: 0 to 10 min (2 min)Control circuit: HC1, HC2, HC3, HC1+HC2, HC1+HC3
CO4 -> F10 - 1: Control of DHW circuit active while circulation pump (ZP) is running

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)F

Comments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)

Function

WE

Anl

11 Operation of
circulation
pump (DHW)
duringstorage tankcharging

0

Not Anl 1.9,
11.0, 11.3,
11.9, 12.0,
12.9, 13.0,
13.9, 21.0,
21.9

12 Control mode

1

1.9, 3.9,
CO4 -> F12 - 1: Three-step control
5.9, 7.x, 8.x,
Function block parameters:
9.x, 11.x,
Minimum speed: 5 to 50 % (20 %)12.x, 13.x,(systems Anl 3.9, 5.9, 17.x, 18.x only)
17.x, 18.x,
KP (gain):21.

CO4 -> F11 - 1: Circulation pump (ZP) runs according to timeschedule during storage tank charging
CO4 -> F11 - 0: Circulation pump (ZP) switched off duringstorage tank charging

0.1 to 50.0 (2.0; systems Anl 1.9, 11.9, 12.9, 13.9, 21.9:
0.6)
Tn (reset time): 1 to 999 s(120 s, systems Anl 3.9, 5.9, 17.x 18.x: 30 s; systems Anl
1.9, 11.9, 12.9, 13.9, 21.9: 12 s)
TV (derivative-action time): 0 to 999 s (0 s)
TY (valve transit time): 15 to 240 s (35 s; systems Anl 1.9,
11.9, 12.9, 13.9, 21.9: 20 s, not systems Anl 3.9, 5.9,
17.x, 18.x)

CO4 -> F12 - 0: On/off control(not systems Anl 3.9, 5.9, 17.x, 18.x); in this case, F12 -0 =F12 - 1 applies
Function block parameters:
Hysteresis: 1.0 to 30.0 °C (5.0 °C)
Min. ON time: 0 to 10 min (2 min)Min. OFF time: 0 to 10 min (2 min)
13 Damping

0

1

EB 5578 EN

All 1)

CO4 -> F13 - 1: OPEN signal damping (only when CO4 ->F12 - 1)
Function block parameters:
Max. system deviation: 3.0 to 10.0 °C (3.0 °C)
CO4 -> F13 - 1: OPEN signal damping (only when CO4 ->F04 - 1, analog setting)
Function block parameters:
Max. system deviation: 3.0 to 10.0 °C (8.0 °C)

16-249Annex A (configuration instructions)

F

Function

WE

14 Thermal
disinfection

0

AnlComments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)

Not systems CO4 -> F14 - 1: Thermal disinfection
Anl 3.9, 5.9, (only when CO4 -> F01 - 1)
17.x, 18.x
Function block parameters:

Day of week: Monday, Tuesday, ..., daily (Wednesday)
Time: Adjustable as required in steps of 15 minutes (00:00 –04:00)
Disinfection temperature: 60.0 to 90.0 °C (70.0 °C)
Set point boost: 0.0 to 50.0 °C (10.0 °C)(systems Anl 1.9, 3.9, 5.9, 11.0, 11.3, 11.5, 11.9, 12.0,
12.9, 13.0, 13.9, 17.x, 18.x, 21.0, 21.9 only)
Duration: 0 to 255 min (0 min)
When Start time = Stop time
Select: Active when BI = OFF, ON (ON)15 SLP
depending on
return flow
temperature0

16 Priority forexternal
demand0

1

3.9, 5.9,
17.x, 18.x

CO4 -> F13 - 1: OPEN signal damping (only when CO4 ->F04 - 1, analog setting)
Function block parameters:
Max. system deviation: 3.0 to 10.0 °C (8.0 °C)

1.5, 1.7,
2.0, 2.1,
2.3, 3.1,
3.3, 4.1,
4.3, 5.1,
11.1

CO4 -> F15 - 1: storage tank charging pump not ON unless return flow
hot(for systems Anl 1.5, 1.7, 2.0, 2.1, 2.3, 4.1, 4.3, 5.1 only when
CO1 -> F03 - 1; for system Anl 11.1 only when CO4 -> F03 - 1)

1.5–1.8, 2.x, CO4 -> F16 - 1: Priority for external demand
3.1–3.4,
Note: a high external demand causes excessive charging tem4.1–4.3, 5.x, peratures in DHW circuits without control valve.
15.0, 15.4,
15.5
7.x–9.x

The default setting cannot be changed in systems Anl 7.x to
9.x.

19 Switchover0

Not systems CO4 -> F19 - 1: Switchover SF1, SF2 according to a timeAnl 1.9, 3.9, schedule. SF1 applies for day mode and SF2 for night mode
5.9, 11.0, (only when CO4 -> F02 - 1)
11.3, 11.5,
11.9, 12.0,
12.9, 13.0,
13.9, 17.x,
18.x, 21.0,
21.9

20 Return flow
control07.1, 8.1,
9.1, 9.5,
11.1, 12.1,
13.1, 21.1

16-250

CO4 -> F20 - 1: DHW circuit additionally controlled by aglobe valve

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)F

WE

21 Speed controlof thechargingpump

0

22 Cold charging
protection

0

1.1

CO4 -> F22 - 1: Storage tank charging started when the primary flow temperature is high enough
Function block parameters:
Valve position: 1 to 100 %23 Electricheating
cartridge

0

Systems Anl
3.9, 17.1,
18.1

CO4 -> F23 - 1: The output BO10 to release the electric heating is activated based on the temperature at SF1 for thermal
disinfection (only when CO4 -> F14 - 1)

1.2, 1.4,
1.6, 1.8,
2.2, 2.4,
3.2, 3.4,
4.2, 5.2,
7.2, 8.2,
9.2, 9.6,
10.2, 11.2,
11.4, 11.6,
12.2, 13.2,
13.6, 14.2,
15.2, 21.2

CO4 -> F24 - 1: only when CO4 -> F14 - 1
Sensor RüF2 as switch-off sensor active

24 Bottom sensor 0
for thermal
disinfection

AnlComments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)

Function

1.5–1.8, 2.x, CO4 -> F21 - 1: Temperature-based adaptation of the delivery
3.1–3.4,
rate of the charging pump
4.1–4.3,
Function block parameters:
5.1, 5.2,
Start speed reduction, limit: 5.0 to 90.0 °C (40.0 °C)
7.x, 8.x, 9.x,
Stop speed reduction, limit: 5.0 to 90.0 °C (50.0 °C)
10.1–10.3,
Min. speed signal: 0 to 50 % (20 %)11.1–11.4,
12.1, 12.2,
13.1, 13,2,
21.1, 21.2

25 ZP speed

0All

CO4 -> F25 - 1: speed control
Temperature sensor RüF4/AF2 active
The output is determined in the CO5 -> F34 or F35 setting withthe 'ZP speed' function.
Function block parameters:
Return flow set point: 5.0 to 90.0 °C (55 °C)
KP (gain): 0.1 to 50.0 (1.0)
Tn (reset time): 30 to 2000 s (300 s)
Minimum speed: 5 to 50 % (10 %)26 SLP
temperature
sensor0

All

CO4 -> F26 - 1: Different sensor for the speed control of thecharging pump
Function block parameters:
Sensor: AF1 to SF3 (RüF2)

EB 5578 EN

16-251

Annex A (configuration instructions)

F

Function

WE

Anl

Comments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)

Not Anl 1.1- CO4 -> F27 - 1: discharging protection active
1.4, 1.9,
3.9, 5.9,
10.1-10.3,
11.0,11.3,
11.9, 12.0,
12.9, 13.0,
13.9, 14.x,
15.x, 17.x,
18.x, 21.0,
21.9

27 Discharging
protection

F Function block number, WE Default setting, Anl System code number

CO5: System-wide functions (all systems)
If the controller indicates CO5 -> F00 - 1, any access to the return flow, flow rate and capacity settings is locked.
F

Function

WE

Anl

01 Sensor type

1

All

02
03
04 Summer
mode

0Comments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)
CO5 -> F01 - 1, F02 - 0: Pt 1000
CO5 -> F01 - 0, F02 - 0: PTC
CO5 -> F01 - 1, F02 - 1: Ni 1000

Not systems CO5 -> F04 - 1: Summer modeAnl 1.5,
Function block parameters:
1.6, 1.9,
Date: adjustable as required (01.06. - 30.09.)
3.5, 10.5,
No. days until activation: 1 to 3 (2)25.5

No. days until deactivation: 1 to 3 (1)Limit: 0.0 to 30.0 °C (18.0 °C)

05 Delayedoutdoortemperature
adaptation(decreasing)0

Not Anl 1.9 CO5 -> F05 - 1: Delayed outdoor temperature adaptation as

06 Delayedoutdoortemperature
adaptation(increasing)0

Not Anl 1.9 CO5 -> F06 - 1: Delayed outdoor temperature adaptation as

16-252the temperature falls
Function block parameters:
Delay/h: 0.2 to 6.0 °C (3.0 °C)

the temperature rises
Function block parameters:
Delay/h: 0.2 to 6.0 °C (3.0 °C)

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

F

Function

WE

07 Error message

0

08 Summer time0

09 Frost
protection

1

AnlComments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)

Not systems CO5 -> F07 - 1: Terminal for error message: see plant scheme
Anl 5.1, 5.2, table
5.9, 6.1, 9.x, Function block parameters:
12.1, 12.2-x,
Relay contact = NO contact, NC contact (NO contact)
13.1, 13.2,
13.6, 15.1,
15.2, 15.3,
17.8, 21.1,
21.2
All

CO5 -> F08 - 1: Summer/standard time switchover

Not systems CO5 -> F09 - 1: Highest priority for frost protection
Anl 1.5,
Function block parameters:
1.6, 1.9,
Limit: –15.0 to +3.0 °C (+3.0 °C)
3.5, 10.5,
CO5-> F09 - 0: Restricted frost protection
25.5

Function block parameters:
Limit: –15.0 to +3.0 °C (+3.0 °C)

10 Capacity
limitation atterminals
17/18

01.5, 1.6,
1.9, 3.5,
10.5, 25.5

0

Not for sys- CO5 -> F10 - 1: Capacity limitation in RK1 with pulses (onlytems with when CO6 -> F12 - 0)
SF3, notFunction block parameters:
system Anl
Max. limit: OT to 800 pulses/h (15 pulses/h)
1.9
1)Max. limit (heating) : OT to 800 pulses/h (15 pulses/h)Max. limit (DHW) 1): 1 to 800 pulses/h (15 pulses/h)Limiting factor: 0.1 to 10.0 (1.0)1)

Not systems Anl 1.0, 1.5-1.8, 3.0, 3.5, 3.9, 4.0, 5.9, 7.x,
10.x, 11.x, 12.x, 13.x, 14.x, 15.x, 16.x, 17.x, 18.x, 21.x,
25.x

12 Creep feed
rate limitation

0

Not Anl 1.9 CO5 -> F12 - 1: Creep feed rate limitation

14 Operation
UP10

3.0, 5.0, 7.x, CO5 -> F14 - 1: Feeder pump UP1 operation to cover own de9.1, 9.2,
mand
12.x, 15.1, Note: the feeder pump UP1 also starts to operate to cover the
16.1, 16.5,
demand of RK2/RK3
16.7, 16.8

EB 5578 EN

Function block parameters:
Switching mode:
Binary at terminals 13/19, analog at input RüF1 (binary)
Active when BI = ON, OFF (ON)

16-253

Annex A (configuration instructions)F

Comments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)

Function

WE

Anl

15 Release0All

CO5 -> F15 - 1: Release controller at BI15, FG1 has no function
Function block parameters:
Active when BI = ON, OFF (ON)16 Return flow
temperature
limitation(proportional
controller)

0All

CO5 -> F16 - 1: Return flow temperature limitation with P algorithm

19 Monitoring0All

CO5 -> F19 - 1: Temperature monitoring

20 Sensor
calibration

1All

CO5 -> F20 - 1: Set all sensor calibration values
CO5 -> F20 - 0: Delete all sensor calibration values

21 Lock manual
level

0

All

CO5 -> F21 - 1: Lock rotary switchInswitch position, the controller runs in automatic mode

22 Lock rotaryswitch0All

CO5 -> F22 - 1: Lock rotary switch
Key number input is still possible.

23 OT with
0-10 V0All

CO5 -> F23 - 1: Outdoor temperature received or sent as 0 to
10 V signal (terminals 19/23)
The output is determined in the CO5 -> F34 setting withthe 'Outdoor temperature' function.
Function block parameters:
Direction: Input, Output (Input)
Lower transmission range: –50.0 to +100.0 °C (–20.0 °C)
Upper transmission range: –50.0 to +100.0 °C (+50.0 °C)

24 0-10 V input

0All

CO5 -> F24 - 1: The measured value at 0 to 10 V input is displayed as a special value.

25 AA1 reverse(0 to 10 V)

0All

CO5 -> F25 - 0: 0 V/0 % = Valve CLOSED/pump OFF
CO5 -> F25 - 1: 0 V/0 % = Valve OPEN/pump with max. delivery rate
Function block parameters:
Zero: 0 to 50 % (0 %)26 AA2 reverse
(PWM)

0

All

CO5 -> F26 - 0: 0 V/0 % = Valve CLOSED/pump OFF
CO5 -> F26 - 1: 0 V/0 % = Valve OPEN/pump with max. delivery rate
Function block parameters:
Zero: 0 to 50 % (0 %)16-254

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

F

Function

31 AE1
zero

WE

Anl

0

All

Comments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)
CO5 -> F31 - 0
Function block parameters:
Lower transmission range: 0 to 150 °C (0 °C)
Upper transmission range: 0 to 150 °C (120 °C)
CO5 -> F31 - 1
Function block parameters:
Zero: 5 to 20 % (5 %)Lower transmission range: 0 to 150 °C (0 °C)
Upper transmission range: 0 to 150 °C (120 °C)

34 AA1 PWM(0 to 10 V)

0All

CO5 -> F34 - 0/- 1: output terminals 21/20 always 0 to 10 V
signalFunction: Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4, 10 V supply, 3 V supply, differential
temperature control, SLP speed, ZP speed, external demand,
outdoor temperature (Y1)

35 AA2 PWM
(PWM)

0

All

CO5 -> F35 - 0/- 1: output terminals 22/20 always PMW signal
Function: Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4, 10 V supply, 3 V supply, differential
temperature control, SLP speed, ZP speed, external demand,
outdoor temperature (Y2)

F Function block number, WE Default setting, Anl System code number

CO6: Modbus (all systems)
F

Function

WE

Anl

Comments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)

01 Modbus

1All

CO6 -> F01 - 1: Modbus active

02 16-bit
address0All

CO6 -> F02 - 1: Modbus 16-bit addressing(only with CO6 -> F01 - 1)
CO6 -> F02 - 0: Modbus 8-bit addressing

03 Modem

0All

04 Automaticconfiguration

0All

CO6 -> F03 to F06 is required to configure the error message
transfer to a connected Modbus/GPRS gateway (1402-0701).

05 Lock dial-up
to building
automation
system0

All

06 Dial-up also
uponcorrected
error

0

All

EB 5578 EN

16-255

Annex A (configuration instructions)F

Comments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)

Function

WE

Anl

07 Monitoring0All

CO6 -> F07 - 1: Control system monitoring > Resets all level
bits to “autonomous“ when there is no communication(only when CO6 -> F01 - 1)

08 Text message

0All

CO6 -> F08 is required to configure the error message transfer
to a connected Modbus/GPRS gateway (1402-0701).

10 Meter bus

0All

CO6 -> F10 - 1: Meter bus active
Function block parameters:
HM 1...3 address: 0 to 255 (255)
HM1...3 model: 1434, Multical3, Apator, SLS/WSF (1434)
HM1...3 mode: 24 h, Continuous, CoiLFor HM1 with '1434' and 'Continuous' settings, additionally:
Additionally:
Select: Tariff: Tar-A, Tar-E (Tar-A, tariff schedule OFF)11 Flow rate
limitation in
RK1

0

Not Anl 1.9 CO6 -> F11 - 1: Flow rate limitation (only when

12 Capacity
limitation in
RK1

0

Not Anl 1.9 CO6 -> F12 - 1: Capacity limitation (only when

13 Flow rate
limitation in
RK2

0

14 Capacity
limitation in
RK2

0

3.0–3.4, 3.9, CO6 -> F13 - 1: Flow rate limitation (only when
4.x, 5.9, 7.x, CO6 -> F10 - 1 and HM2 is activated)
8.x, 10.x,
Function block parameters:
11.x, 12.x,
Max. limit: 0.01 to 650 m³/h (1.5 m³/h)
13.x, 15.x,
Limiting factor: 0.1 to 10 (1)16.1, 16.6,
16.8, 17.x, CO6 -> F14 - 1: Capacity limitation (only when
18.x, 21.x, CO6 -> F10 - 1 and HM2 is activated)
25.x
Function block parameters:

16-256CO6 -> F10 - 1 and HM1 is activated)
Function block parameters:
Max. limit: OT to 650 m³/h (1.5 m³/h)
Max. limit (heating) 1): OT to 650 m³/h (1.5 m³/h)
Max. limit (DHW) 1): 0.01 to 650 m³/h (1.5 m³/h)
Limiting factor: 0.1 to 10 (1)CO6 -> F10 - 1 and HM1 is activated)
Function block parameters:
Max. limit: OT to 6500 kW (1.5 kW)
Max. limit (heating) 1): OT to 6500 kW (1.5 kW)
Max. limit (DHW) 1): 0.1 to 6500 kW (1.5 kW)
Limiting factor: 0.1 to 10 (1)Max. limit: 0.1 to 6500 kW (1.5 kW)
Limiting factor: 0.1 to 10 (1)EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)F

Anl

Comments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)

Function

WE

15 Flow rate
limitation in
RK3

05.9, 12.x, CO6 -> F15 - 1: Flow rate limitation (only when
13.x, 15.x, CO6 -> F10 - 1 and HM3 is activated)
16.5, 16.7,
Function block parameters:
16.8, 17.8,
Max. limit: 0.01 to 650 m³/h (1.5 m³/h)
21.x, 25.x

16 Capacity
limitation in
RK3

0

CO6 -> F16 - 1: Capacity limitation (only when
CO6 -> F10 - 1 and HM3 is activated)
Function block parameters:
Max. limit: 0.1 to 6500 kW (1.5 kW)
Limiting factor: 0.1 to 10 (1)17 Return flow
temperature
limitation
based oncapacity0All

CO6 -> F17 - 1: new maximum return flow limit at a capacity
higher than the max. limit (only when CO6 -> F10 - 1 and activated HM1)
Function block parameters:
Max. limit: 0.1 to 6500 kW (1.5 kW)
Max. return flow temperature: 5.0 to 90 °C (55 °C)

20 Modbus
without
building
automation
system0All

CO6 -> F20 - 1: Various Modbus specifications do not haveany effect on the collective level/building automation system
reading

Limiting factor: 0.1 to 10 (1)1)

Not systems Anl 1.0, 1.5-1.8, 3.0, 3.5, 4.0, 7.x, 10.x, 11.x, 12.x, 13.x, 14.x, 15.x, 16.x, 17.x, 21.x, 25.x

F Function block number, WE Default setting, Anl System code number

CO7: Device bus (all systems)
F

Comments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)

Function

WE

Anl

01 Device bus

0All

CO7 -> F01 - 1: Device bus active
Function block parameters:
Device bus address/Auto 1), 1 to 32 (32)1)
Auto = Automatic search for a free device bus address inthe system

02 Clock synchronization

0All

CO7 -> F02 - 1: controller sends its system time to all devicebus participants once every 24 hours

EB 5578 EN

16-257

Annex A (configuration instructions)

F

Function

WE

03 Room panel
RK1

0

Anl

Comments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)

1.0–1.4, 2.x, CO7 -> F03 - 1: communication with TROVIS 5570 for RK1
4.x, 6.0, 9.5, active, CO1 -> F01 - 1 automatically set
9.6, 10.x,
Function block parameters:
11.x, 13.x,
Device bus address/Auto 1), 1 to 32 (32)21.x, 25.x 1)

Auto = Automatic search for a room panel set to detectionmode

04 Room panel
RK20

3.0–3.4, 4.x, CO7 -> F04 - 1: communication with TROVIS 5570 for RK2
5.x, 6.0,
active, CO2 -> F01 - 1 automatically set
10.x, 16.1,
Function block parameters:
16.6, 16.8,
Device bus address/Auto 1), 1 to 32 (32)25.x1)

Auto = Automatic search for a room panel set to detectionmode

05 Room panel
RK305.x, 6.0, 9.x, CO7 -> F05 - 1: communication with TROVIS 5570 for RK3
12.x, 13.x, active, CO3 -> F01 - 1 automatically set
15.x, 16.5,
Function block parameters:
16.7, 16.8,
Device bus address/Auto 1), 1 to 32 (32)21.x, 25.x 1)

Auto = Automatic search for a room panel set to detectionmode

06 Send AF1

0All

CO7 -> F06 - 1:
Function block parameters:
Register number/1 to 4 (1)07 Receive AF1

0All

CO7 -> F07 - 1:
Function block parameters:
Register number/1 to 4 (1)08 Send AF2

0All

CO7 -> F08 - 1: Analysis active
Function block parameters:
Register number/1 to 4 (2)09 Receive AF20

10 Send demand
RK1

0

All

CO7 -> F10 - 1: Send demand
Function block parameters:
Register number/5 to 64 (5)11 Send demand
RK2

0

All

CO7 -> F11 - 1:
Function block parameters:
Register number/5 to 64 (5)12 Send demand
RK3

0

All

CO7 -> F12 - 1:
Function block parameters:
Register number/5 to 64 (5)16-258

Not Anl 1.9 CO7 -> F09 - 1:

Function block parameters:
Register number/1 to 4 (2)EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)F

Comments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)

Function

WE

Anl

13 Send demand
DHW

0

All

CO7 -> F13 - 1: 'Charging temperature boost' (P04) is generated in the PA4 level
Function block parameters:
Register number/5 to 64 (5)14 Send max.
demand0All

CO7 -> F14 - 1: the controller already determines internally the
maximum flow set point of its circuit and sends it this value tothe primary controllers

15 Receive
external
demand in
RK1

0

All

CO7 -> F15 - 1: External demand processing in RK1
Function block parameters:
Register number/5 to 64 (5)16 Receive errors

0All

CO7 -> F16 - 1: the controller generates the 'External' message
as long as the faults of the other device bus participants exist.

17 Receive
external
demand in
RK2

0

All

CO7 -> F17 - 1: External demand processing in RK2
Function block parameters:
Register number/5 to 64 (5)18 Receive
external
demand in
RK3

0

All

CO7 -> F18 - 1: External demand processing in RK3
Function block parameters:
Register number/5 to 64 (5)19 Raise returnflow
temperature

0All

CO7 -> F19 - 1: Return flow temperature limit in RK1 raised
when 'DHW heating active' message is received over the device bus
Function block parameters:
Register number/5 to 64 (32)

20 Send 'DHW
heating
active'0All

CO7 -> F20 - 1:
Function block parameters:
Register number/5 to 64 (32)

21 Receive
release RK1

0All

CO7 -> F21 - 1:
Function block parameters:
Register number/5 to 64 (32)

22 Receive
release RK20

EB 5578 EN

3.1–3.4, 4.x, CO7 -> F22 - 1:
5.x, 6.x,
Function block parameters:
10.x, 16.1,
Register number/5 to 64 (32)16.6, 16.8,
25.x

16-259Annex A (configuration instructions)F

Anl

Comments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)

Function

WE

23 Receive
release RK3

0

31 Ext-HC11

0All

CO7 -> F31 - 1: TROVIS I/O for heating circuit 11 active
Function block parameters:
Device bus address: 11 to 19 (11)Connected/primary circuit, to HC1 (to HC1)

32 Ext-HK120All

CO7 -> F32 - 1: TROVIS I/O for heating circuit 12 active
Function block parameters:
Device bus address: 11 to 19 (12)Connected/primary circuit, to HC1 (to HC1)

33 Ext-HK130All

CO7 -> F33 - 1: TROVIS I/O for heating circuit 13 active
Function block parameters:
Device bus address: 11 to 19 (13)Connected/primary circuit, to HC1 (to HC1)

5.x, 6.x, 9.x, CO7 -> F23 - 1:
12.x, 13.x,
Function block parameters:
15.x, 16.5,
Register number/5 to 64 (32)16.7, 16.8,
21.x, 25.x

F Function block number, WE Default setting, Anl System code number

CO8: Initialization of BI1 and BI2 (all systems)
F

Comments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)

Function

WE

Anl

01 Analysis of
BI1

0

All

CO8 -> F01 - 1: Analysis active
Function block parameter: 1)

02 Analysis of
BI2

0

All

CO8 -> F02 - 1: Analysis active
Function block parameter: 1)

03 Analysis of
BI3

0

All

CO8 -> F03 - 1: Analysis active
Function block parameter: 1)

04 Analysis of
BI4

0

All

CO8 -> F04 - 1: Analysis active
Function block parameter: 1)

05 Analysis of
BI5

0

All

CO8 -> F05 - 1: Analysis active
Function block parameter: 1)

06 Analysis of
BI6

0

All

CO8 -> F06 - 1: Analysis active
Function block parameter: 1)

09

Analysis of
BI9

0

All

CO8 -> F09 - 1: Analysis active
Function block parameter: 1)

10

Analysis of
BI10

0

All

CO8 -> F10 - 1: Analysis active
Function block parameter: 1)

16-260EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)F

Comments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)

Function

WE

Anl

11 Analysis of
BI11

0

All

CO8 -> F11 - 1: Analysis active
Function block parameter: 1)

12

Analysis of
BI12

0

All

CO8 -> F12 - 1: Analysis active
Function block parameter: 1)

13

Analysis of
BI13

0

All

CO8 -> F13 - 1: Analysis active
Function block parameter: 1)

15 Analysis of
BI15

0

All

CO8 -> F15 - 1: Analysis active
Function block parameter: 1)

16 Analysis of
BI16

0

All

CO8 -> F16 - 1: Analysis active
Function block parameter: 1)

17 Analysis of
BI17

0

All

CO8 -> F17 - 1: Analysis active
Function block parameter: 1)

1)

Error message when BI = 0, BI = 1, none (1)F Function block number, WE Default setting, Anl System code number

CO11: RK11 · Heating circuit 11
F

Comments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)

Function

WE

Anl

01 Room sensor

0

All

CO11 -> F01 - 1: Room sensor RF11; temperature reading active

02 Outdoor
sensor0

All

CO11 -> F02 - 1: Use of measured value AF1; outdoor-temperature-compensated control active

03 Return flow
sensor

1

All

CO11 -> F03 - 1: Rücklaufsensor RüF11; Begrenzungsfunktion
aktiv
Function block parameters:
KP (limiting factor): 0.1 to 10.0 (1.0)

05 Underfloor
heating0

All

CO11 -> F05 - 1: Underfloor heating/drying of jointless floors
Function block parameters:
Boost: 0.0 to 50.0 °C (0.0 °C)
Start temperature: 20 to 60 °C (25 °C)
Hold (days): 0 to 10 days (0 days)
Temp. rise/day: 0.0 to 20.0 °C (5.0 °C)
Maximum temperature: 25.0 to 60.0 °C (45.0 °C)
Hold (days): 0 to 30 days (4 days)
Temp. reduction/day: 0.0 to 20.0 °C (0.0 °C)
Start condition: Stop, Start, Hold, Reduction

EB 5578 EN

16-261

Annex A (configuration instructions)F

Comments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)

Function

WE

Anl

07 Optimization

0

All

CO11 -> F07 - 1: Optimization of heating times(only when CO11 > F01 - 1 and CO11 -> F02 - 1)

08 Adaptation

0

All

CO11 -> F08 - 1: Heating characteristic adaptation(only when CO11 -> F01 - 1, CO11 -> F02 - 1 and CO11 ->F11 - 0)09 Flashadaptation

0

All

CO11 -> F09 - 1: Flash adaptation of flow temperature(only when CO11 -> F01 - 1)
Function block parameters:
Cycle time: 0 or 1 to 100 min (20 min)
KP (gain): 0.0 to 25.0 (0.0)

11 Four-point
characteristic

0

All

CO11 -> F11 - 1: Four-point characteristic (only when
CO11 -> F08 - 0)
CO11 -> F11 - 0: Gradient characteristic

12 Three-step
control mode

1

All

CO11 -> F12 - 1: Three-step control
Function block parameters:
KP (gain): 0.1 to 50.0 (2.0)
Tn (reset time): 1 to 999 s (120 s)
TV (derivative-action time): 0 to 999 s (0 s)
TY (valve transit time): 15, 20, 25, …, 240 s (35 s)
CO11 -> F12 - 0: On/off control
Function block parameters:
Hysteresis: 1.0 to 30.0 °C (5.0 °C)
Min. ON time: 0 to 10 min (2 min)Min. OFF time: 0 to 10 min (2 min)

13 Damping

0

All

CO11 -> F13 - 1: OPEN signal damping (only when CO11 -> F12 - 1)
Function block parameters:
Max. system deviation: 3.0 to 10.0 °C (3.0 °C)

28 Variable night
set-back

0

All

CO11 -> F28 - 1: variable night set-back(only when CO11 -> F11 - 0)
Function block parameters:
OTL night 100 %: –50.0 to +20.0 °C (+5.0 °C)
OTL day 0 %: –50.0 to +5.0 °C (–15.0 °C)

F Function block number, WE Default setting, Anl System code number

16-262EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

CO12: RK12 · Heating circuit 12
F

Comments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)

Function

WE

Anl

01 Room sensor

0

All

CO12 -> F01 - 1: Room sensor RF12; temperature reading active

02 Outdoor
sensor0

All

CO12 -> F02 - 1: Use of measured value AF1; outdoor-temperature-compensated control active

03 Return flow
sensor

1

All

CO12 -> F03 - 1: return flow sensor RüF12; limitation function
activeFunction block parameters:
KP (limiting factor): 0.1 to 10.0 (1.0)

05 Underfloor
heating0

All

CO12 -> F05 - 1: Underfloor heating/drying of jointless floors
Function block parameters:
Boost: 0.0 to 50.0 °C (0.0 °C)
Start temperature: 20 to 60 °C (25 °C)
Hold (days): 0 to 10 days (0 days)
Temp. rise/day: 0.0 to 20.0 °C (5.0 °C)
Maximum temperature: 25.0 to 60.0 °C (45.0 °C)
Hold (days): 0 to 30 days (4 days)
Temp. reduction/day: 0.0 to 20.0 °C (0.0 °C)
Start condition: Stop, Start, Hold, Reduction

07 Optimization

0

All

CO12 -> F07 - 1: Optimization of heating times(only when CO12 > F01 - 1 and CO12 -> F02 - 1)

08 Adaptation

0

All

CO12 -> F08 - 1: Heating characteristic adaptation(only when CO12 -> F01 - 1, CO12 -> F02 - 1 and CO12 ->F11 - 0)09 Flashadaptation

0

All

CO12 -> F09 - 1: Flash adaptation of flow temperature(only when CO12 -> F01 - 1)
Function block parameters:
Cycle time: 0 or 1 to 100 min (20 min)
KP (gain): 0.0 to 25.0 (0.0)

11 Four-point
characteristic

0

All

CO12 -> F11 - 1: Four-point characteristic (only when
CO11 -> F08 - 0)
CO12 -> F11 - 0: Gradient characteristic

EB 5578 EN

16-263

Annex A (configuration instructions)

F

Function

WE

Anl

12 Three-step
control mode

1

All

Comments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)
CO12 -> F12 - 1: Three-step control
Function block parameters:
KP (gain): 0.1 to 50.0 (2.0)
Tn (reset time): 1 to 999 s (120 s)
TV (derivative-action time): 0 to 999 s (0 s)
TY (valve transit time): 15, 20, 25, …, 240 s (35 s)
CO12 -> F12 - 0: On/off control
Function block parameters:
Hysteresis: 1.0 to 30.0 °C (5.0 °C)
Min. ON time: 0 to 10 min (2 min)Min. OFF time: 0 to 10 min (2 min)

13 Damping

0

All

CO12 -> F13 - 1: OPEN signal damping (only when CO11 -> F12 - 1)
Function block parameters:
Max. system deviation: 3.0 to 10.0 °C (3.0 °C)

28 Variable night
set-back

0

All

CO12 -> F28 - 1: variable night set-back(only when CO12 -> F11 - 0)
Function block parameters:
OTL night 100 %: –50.0 to +20.0 °C (+5.0 °C)
OTL day 0 %: –50.0 to +5.0 °C (–15.0 °C)

F Function block number, WE Default setting, Anl System code number

16-264

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)CO13: RK13 · Heating circuit 13
F

Comments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)

Function

WE

Anl

01 Room sensor

0

All

CO13 -> F01 - 1: Room sensor RF13; temperature reading active

02 Outdoor
sensor0

All

CO13 -> F02 - 1: Use of measured value AF1; outdoor-temperature-compensated control active

03 Return flow
sensor

1

All

CO13 -> F03 - 1: Return flow sensor RüF13; limitation function
activeFunction block parameters:
KP (limiting factor): 0.1 to 10.0 (1.0)

05 Underfloor
heating0

All

CO13 -> F05 - 1: Underfloor heating/drying of jointless floors
Function block parameters:
Boost: 0.0 to 50.0 °C (0.0 °C)
Start temperature: 20 to 60 °C (25 °C)
Hold (days): 0 to 10 days (0 days)
Temp. rise/day: 0.0 to 20.0 °C (5.0 °C)
Maximum temperature: 25.0 to 60.0 °C (45.0 °C)
Hold (days): 0 to 30 days (4 days)
Temp. reduction/day: 0.0 to 20.0 °C (0.0 °C)
Start condition: Stop, Start, Hold, Reduction

07 Optimization

0

All

CO13 -> F07 - 1: Optimization of heating times(only when CO13 > F01 - 1 and CO13 -> F02 - 1)

08 Adaptation

0

All

CO13 -> F08 - 1: Heating characteristic adaptation(only when CO13 -> F01 - 1, CO13 -> F02 - 1 and CO13 ->F11 - 0)09 Flashadaptation

0

All

CO13 -> F09 - 1: Flash adaptation of flow temperature(only when CO13 -> F01 - 1)
Function block parameters:
Cycle time: 0 or 1 to 100 min (20 min)
KP (gain): 0.0 to 25.0 (0.0)

11 Four-point
characteristic

0

All

CO13 -> F11 - 1: Four-point characteristic (only when
CO13 -> F08 - 0)
CO13 -> F11 - 0: Gradient characteristic

EB 5578 EN

16-265

Annex A (configuration instructions)

F

Function

WE

Anl

12 Three-step
control mode

1

All

Comments
Function block parameters: value range (default setting)
CO13 -> F12 - 1: Three-step control
Function block parameters:
KP (gain): 0.1 to 50.0 (2.0)
Tn (reset time): 1 to 999 s (120 s)
TV (derivative-action time): 0 to 999 s (0 s)
TY (valve transit time): 15, 20, 25, …, 240 s (35 s)
CO13 -> F12 - 0: On/off control
Function block parameters:
Hysteresis: 1.0 to 30.0 °C (5.0 °C)
Min. ON time: 0 to 10 min (2 min)Min. OFF time: 0 to 10 min (2 min)

13 Damping

0

All

CO13 -> F13 - 1: OPEN signal damping (only when CO11 -> F12 - 1)
Function block parameters:
Max. system deviation: 3.0 to 10.0 °C (3.0 °C)

28 Variable night
set-back

0

All

CO13 -> F28 - 1: variable night set-back(only when CO13 -> F11 - 0)
Function block parameters:
OTL night 100 %: –50.0 to +20.0 °C (+5.0 °C)
OTL day 0 %: –50.0 to +5.0 °C (–15.0 °C)

F Function block number, WE Default setting, Anl System code number

16-266

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)16.7 Parameter lists
PA1: Heating circuit HC1
P

ReadingParameter: Value range (default setting)01

Flow gradient:
0.2 to 3.2 (1.2)
0.2 to 1.0 (0.5) with CO1 -> F05 - 1

02

Level (parallel shift):–30.0 to 30.0 °C (0.0 °C)

03Flow set point (day) (only when CO1 -> F02 - 0 and
CO1 -> F09 - 1):–5.0 to 150.0 °C (50.0 °C)

04

Flow set point (night) (only when CO1 -> F02 - 0 and CO1 ->F09 - 1):–5.0 to 150.0 °C (30.0 °C)

05

Four-point characteristic
Outdoor temperature:–50.0 to 50.0 °C (–15.0 °C, –5.0 °C, 5.0 °C, 15.0 °C)–50.0 to 50.0 °C (5.0 °C, 15.0 °C, 25.0 °C, 35.0 °C) 1)
Flow temperature:–5.0 to 150.0 °C (70.0 °C, 55.0 °C, 40.0 °C, 25.0 °C)–5.0 to 150.0 °C (20.0 °C, 15.0 °C, 10.0 °C, 5.0 °C) 1)
Reduced flow temperature:–5.0 to 150.0 °C (60.0 °C, 40.0 °C, 20.0 °C, 20.0 °C)–5.0 to 150.0 °C (30.0 °C, 25.0 °C, 20.0 °C, 15.0 °C) 1)
Return flow temperature:
5.0 to 90.0 °C (65.0 °C, 65.0 °C, 65.0 °C, 65.0 °C)
Flow rate:
0.01 to 650 m³/h (0.00 m³/h, 0.00 m³/h, 0.00 m³/h, 0.00 m³/h)

Capacity:
0.1 to 6500 kW (with CO6 -> F12 - 1) or
1 to 800 pulse/h (with CO5 -> F10 - 1)
(0.0 kW, 0.0 kW, 0.0 kW, 0.0 kW) or(0.0 pulse/h, 0.0 pulse/h, 0.0 pulse/h, 0.0 pulse/h)EB 5578 EN

16-267

Annex A (configuration instructions)P

ReadingParameter: Value range (default setting)06

Min. flow temperature:–5.0 to 150.0 °C (20.0 °C)

07

Max. flow temperature:
5.0 to 150.0 °C (70.0 °C)
5.0 to 50.0 °C (50.0 °C) when CO1 -> F05 - 1

09

Outdoor temperature for continuous day mode:–50.0 to 5.0 °C (–15 °C)

10Minimum flow temperature set point HC for binary demand
processing:
5.0 to 150.0 °C (40.0 °C)

11Return flow gradient (only when CO1 -> F03 - 1):
0.2 to 3.2 (1.2)

12Return flow level (only when CO1 -> F03 - 1):–30.0 to 30.0 °C (0.0 °C)

13Base point for return flow temperature (only when
CO1 -> F03 - 1):
5.0 to 90.0 °C (65.0 °C)

14Max. return flow temperature (only when CO1 -> F03 - 1):
5.0 to 90.0 °C (65.0 °C)

15

Set point boost (pre-control circuit):
0.0 to 50.0 °C (5.0 °C)

16

Minimum set point to charge buffer tank:
AUTO to 90.0 °C (AUTO)

17

Stop charging of the buffer tank:
AUTO to 90.0 °C (AUTO)

18

Charging temperature boost:
0.0 to 50.0 °C (6.0 °C)

19

Lag time of charging pump
0.0 to 10.0 (1.0)
1)

16-268With cooling control with or without outdoor sensor

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

PA2: Heating circuit HC2
P

ReadingParameter: Value range (default setting)01

Flow gradient:
0.2 to 3.2 (1.2)
0.2 to 1.0 (0.5) with CO2 -> F05 - 1

02

Level (parallel shift):–30.0 to 30.0 °C (0.0 °C)

03Flow set point (day) (only when CO1, CO2 -> F02 - 0 and
CO2 -> F09 - 1): –5.0 to 150.0 °C (50.0 °C)

04

Flow set point (night) (only with CO1, CO2 -> F02 - 0 and
CO2 > F09 - 1): –5.0 to 150.0 °C (30.0 °C)

05

Four-point characteristic
Outdoor temperature:–50.0 to 50.0 °C (–15.0 °C, –5.0 °C, 5.0 °C, 15.0 °C)–50.0 to 50.0 °C (5.0 °C, 15.0 °C, 25.0 °C, 35.0 °C) 1)
Flow temperature:–5.0 to 150.0 °C (70.0 °C, 55.0 °C, 40.0 °C, 25.0 °C)–5.0 to 150.0 °C (20.0 °C, 15.0 °C, 10.0 °C, 5.0 °C) 1)
Reduced flow temperature:–5.0 to 150.0 °C (60.0 °C, 40.0 °C, 20.0 °C, 20.0 °C)–5.0 to 150.0 °C (30.0 °C, 25.0 °C, 20.0 °C, 15.0 °C) 1)
Return flow temperature:
5.0 to 90.0 °C (65.0 °C, 65.0 °C, 65.0 °C, 65.0 °C)

06

Min. flow temperature:–5.0 to 150.0 °C (20.0 °C)

07

Max. flow temperature:
5.0 to 150.0 °C (70.0 °C)
5.0 to 50.0 °C (50.0 °C) when CO2 -> F05 - 1

09

Outdoor temperature for continuous day mode:–50.0 to 5.0 °C (–15 °C)

11Return flow gradient (only when CO2 -> F03 - 1):
0.2 to 3.2 (1.2)

12Return flow level (only when CO2 -> F03 - 1):–30.0 to 30.0 °C (0.0 °C)

EB 5578 EN

16-269Annex A (configuration instructions)P

ReadingParameter: Value range (default setting)13

Base point for return flow temperature (only when
CO2 -> F03 - 1):
5.0 to 90.0 °C (65.0 °C)

14Max. return flow temperature:
5.0 to 90.0 °C (65.0 °C)

15

Set point boost (pre-control circuit):
0.0 to 50.0 °C (5.0 °C)
1)With cooling control with or without outdoor sensor

PA3: Heating circuit HC3
P

ReadingParameter: Value range (default setting)01

Flow gradient:
0.2 to 3.2 (1.2)
0.2 to 1.0 (0.5) with CO3 -> F05 - 1

02

Level (parallel shift):–30.0 to 30.0 °C (0.0 °C)

03Flow set point (day) (only when CO1, CO3 -> F02 - 0 and
CO3 -> F09 - 1): –5.0 to 150.0 °C (50.0 °C)

04

Flow set point (night) (only with CO1, CO3 -> F02 - 0 and
CO3 > F09 - 1): –5.0 to 150.0 °C (30.0 °C)

05

Four-point characteristic
Outdoor temperature:–50.0 to 50.0 °C (–15.0 °C, –5.0 °C, 5.0 °C, 15.0 °C)–50.0 to 50.0 °C (5.0 °C, 15.0 °C, 25.0 °C, 35.0 °C) 1)
Flow temperature:–5.0 to 150.0 °C (70.0 °C, 55.0 °C, 40.0 °C, 25.0 °C)–5.0 to 150.0 °C (20.0 °C, 15.0 °C, 10.0 °C, 5.0 °C) 1)
Reduced flow temperature:–5.0 to 150.0 °C (60.0 °C, 40.0 °C, 20.0 °C, 20.0 °C)–5.0 to 150.0 °C (30.0 °C, 25.0 °C, 20.0 °C, 15.0 °C) 1)
Return flow temperature:
5.0 to 90.0 °C (65.0 °C, 65.0 °C, 65.0 °C, 65.0 °C)

06

16-270Min. flow temperature:–5.0 to 150.0 °C (20.0 °C)

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)P

ReadingParameter: Value range (default setting)07

Max. flow temperature:
5.0 to 150.0 °C (70.0 °C)
5.0 to 50.0 °C (50.0 °C) when CO3 -> F05 - 1

09

Outdoor temperature for continuous day mode:–50.0 to 5.0 °C (–15 °C)

11Return flow gradient (only when CO3 -> F03 - 1):
0.2 to 3.2 (1.2)

12Return flow level (only when CO3 -> F03 - 1):–30.0 to 30.0 °C (0.0 °C)

13Base point for return flow temperature (only when
CO3 -> F03 - 1):
5.0 to 90.0 °C (65.0 °C)

14Max. return flow temperature:
5.0 to 90.0 °C (65.0 °C)

15

Set point boost (pre-control circuit):
0.0 to 50.0 °C (5.0 °C)
1)With cooling control with or without outdoor sensor

PA4: Domestic hot water heating (DHW)P

ReadingParameter: Value range (default setting)01

Min. adjustable DHW set point:
5.0 to 90.0 °C (40.0 °C)

02Max. adjustable DHW set point:
5.0 to 90.0 °C (90.0 °C)

03

Hysteresis:
1.0 to 30.0 °C (5.0 °C)

04

Charging temperature boost:
0.0 to 50.0 °C (10.0 °C)

05

Max. charging temperature (only when CO4 -> F05 - 1):
20.0 to 150.0 °C (80.0 °C)

07

Max. return flow temperature:
5.0 to 90.0 °C (65.0 °C)

10Solar circuit pump ON:
1.0 to 30.0 °C (10.0 °C)

EB 5578 EN

16-271

Annex A (configuration instructions)P

ReadingParameter: Value range (default setting)11

Solar circuit pump OFF:0.0 to 30.0 °C (3.0 °C)

12Max. storage tank temperature:
20.0 to 90.0 °C (80.0 °C)

13Maximum buffer tank temperature:
20.0 to 90.0 °C (80.0 °C)

14Control signal DHW for storage tank charging:
5 to 100 % (100 %)19

Lag time for storage tank charging pump (= Valve transit time x
P19):
0.0 to 10.0 (1.0)

21

Return flow temperature limit, layering at top:
5.0 to 90.0 °C (25.0 °C)

PA5: System-wide parameters
P

ReadingParameter: Value range (default setting)01

Start temperature for boiler pump (only systems Anl 14.1,
14.2, 15.1, 15.2, 16.2, 16.4, 16.5, 16.7): 20.0 to 90.0 °C(60.0 °C)

02

Boiler pump hysteresis (only system Anl 14.1, 14.2, 15.1,
15.2, 16.2, 16.4, 16.5, 16.7): 0.0 to 30.0 °C (5.0 °C)

PA6: Modbus
P

ReadingParameter: Value range (default setting)
Modbus station address (8 bit):
1 to 246 (255)
1 to 3200 (255) with CO6 > F02 - 1

01

PA11: Heating circuit HC11
P

Reading

01

16-272

Parameter: Value range (default setting)Flow gradient:
0.2 to 3.2 (1.2)
0.2 to 1.0 (0.5) with CO11 -> F05 - 1

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)P

ReadingParameter: Value range (default setting)02

Level (parallel shift):–30.0 to 30.0 °C (0.0 °C)

03Flow set point (day) (only when CO11 -> F02 - 0 and
CO11 -> F09 - 1): –5.0 to 150.0 °C (50.0 °C)

04

Flow set point (night) (only with CO11 -> F02 - 0 and
CO11 > F09 - 1): –5.0 to 150.0 °C (30.0 °C)

05

Four-point characteristic
Outdoor temperature:–50.0 to 50.0 °C (–15.0 °C, –5.0 °C, 5.0 °C, 15.0 °C)
Flow temperature:–5.0 to 150.0 °C (70.0 °C, 55.0 °C, 40.0 °C, 25.0 °C)
Reduced flow temperature:–5.0 to 150.0 °C (60.0 °C, 40.0 °C, 20.0 °C, 20.0 °C)
Return flow temperature:
5.0 to 90.0 °C (65.0 °C, 65.0 °C, 65.0 °C, 65.0 °C)

06

Min. flow temperature:–5.0 to 150.0 °C (20.0 °C)

07

Max. flow temperature:
5.0 to 150.0 °C (70.0 °C)
5.0 to 50.0 °C (50.0 °C) when CO11 -> F05 - 1

09

Outdoor temperature for continuous day mode:–50.0 to 5.0 °C (–15 °C)

11Return flow gradient (only when CO11 -> F03 - 1):
0.2 to 3.2 (1.2)

12Return flow level (only when CO11 -> F03 - 1):–30.0 to 30.0 °C (0.0 °C)

13Base point for return flow temperature (only when
CO11 -> F03 - 1):
5.0 to 90.0 °C (65.0 °C)

14Max. return flow temperature:
5.0 to 90.0 °C (65.0 °C)

EB 5578 EN

16-273

Annex A (configuration instructions)

PA12: Heating circuit HC12
P

ReadingParameter: Value range (default setting)01

Flow gradient:
0.2 to 3.2 (1.2)
0.2 to 1.0 (0.5) with CO12 -> F05 - 1

02

Level (parallel shift):–30.0 to 30.0 °C (0.0 °C)

03Flow set point (day) (only when CO12 -> F02 - 0 and
CO12 -> F09 - 1): –5.0 to 150.0 °C (50.0 °C)

04

Flow set point (night) (only with CO12 -> F02 - 0 and
CO12 > F09 - 1): –5.0 to 150.0 °C (30.0 °C)

05

Four-point characteristic
Outdoor temperature:–50.0 to 50.0 °C (–15.0 °C, –5.0 °C, 5.0 °C, 15.0 °C)
Flow temperature:–5.0 to 150.0 °C (70.0 °C, 55.0 °C, 40.0 °C, 25.0 °C)
Reduced flow temperature:–5.0 to 150.0 °C (60.0 °C, 40.0 °C, 20.0 °C, 20.0 °C)
Return flow temperature:
5.0 to 90.0 °C (65.0 °C, 65.0 °C, 65.0 °C, 65.0 °C)

06

Min. flow temperature:–5.0 to 150.0 °C (20.0 °C)

07

Max. flow temperature:
5.0 to 150.0 °C (70.0 °C)
5.0 to 50.0 °C (50.0 °C) when CO12 -> F05 - 1

09

Outdoor temperature for continuous day mode:–50.0 to 5.0 °C (–15 °C)

11Return flow gradient (only when CO12 -> F03 - 1):
0.2 to 3.2 (1.2)

12Return flow level (only when CO12 -> F03 - 1):–30.0 to 30.0 °C (0.0 °C)

13Base point for return flow temperature (only when
CO12 -> F03 - 1):
5.0 to 90.0 °C (65.0 °C)

14Max. return flow temperature:
5.0 to 90.0 °C (65.0 °C)

16-274

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

PA13: Heating circuit HC13
P

ReadingParameter: Value range (default setting)01

Flow gradient:
0.2 to 3.2 (1.2)
0.2 to 1.0 (0.5) with CO13 -> F05 - 1

02

Level (parallel shift):–30.0 to 30.0 °C (0.0 °C)

03Flow set point (day) (only when CO13 -> F02 - 0 and
CO13 -> F09 - 1): –5.0 to 150.0 °C (50.0 °C)

04

Flow set point (night) (only with CO13 -> F02 - 0 and
CO13 > F09 - 1): –5.0 to 150.0 °C (30.0 °C)

05

Four-point characteristic
Outdoor temperature:–50.0 to 50.0 °C (–15.0 °C, –5.0 °C, 5.0 °C, 15.0 °C)
Flow temperature:–5.0 to 150.0 °C (70.0 °C, 55.0 °C, 40.0 °C, 25.0 °C)
Reduced flow temperature:–5.0 to 150.0 °C (60.0 °C, 40.0 °C, 20.0 °C, 20.0 °C)
Return flow temperature:
5.0 to 90.0 °C (65.0 °C, 65.0 °C, 65.0 °C, 65.0 °C)

06

Min. flow temperature:–5.0 to 150.0 °C (20.0 °C)

07

Max. flow temperature:
5.0 to 150.0 °C (70.0 °C)
5.0 to 50.0 °C (50.0 °C) when CO13 -> F05 - 1

09

Outdoor temperature for continuous day mode:–50.0 to 5.0 °C (–15 °C)

11Return flow gradient (only when CO13 -> F03 - 1):
0.2 to 3.2 (1.2)

12Return flow level (only when CO13 -> F03 - 1):–30.0 to 30.0 °C (0.0 °C)

13Base point for return flow temperature (only when
CO13 -> F03 - 1):
5.0 to 90.0 °C (65.0 °C)

14Max. return flow temperature:
5.0 to 90.0 °C (65.0 °C)

EB 5578 EN

16-275

Annex A (configuration instructions)16.8 Customer-specific data
StationOperator
SAMSON office
System code number
Function block settings in configuration levels
F01
F02
F03
F04
F05
F06
F07
F08
F09
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20

CO1

CO2

CO3

CO4

CO5

CO6

CO7

CO8

CO11

CO12

CO13

F21
F22
F23
F24
F25
F26
F27
F28
F31
F32
F33
F34
F35

16-276

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

Settings at the rotary switch · Set points
Parameters

Switch position

Value range

HC1 room temperature
HC2 room temperature
HC3 room temperature

0.0 to 40.0 °C

HC11 room temperature
HC12 room temperature
HC13 room temperature

Min. to max.
DHW temperature

DHW temperature
HC1 OT deactivation value
HC2 OT deactivation value
HC3 OT deactivation value–50.0 to+50.0 °C

HC11 OT deactivation value
HC12 OT deactivation value
HC13 OT deactivation value
Parameters

Switch position

Value range

HC1 room temperature
HC2 room temperature
HC3 room temperature
HC11 room temperature

0.0 to 40.0 °C

HC12 room temperature
HC13 room temperature
DHW temperature

Min. to max.
DHW temperature

HC1 OT deactivation value
HC2 OT deactivation value
HC3 OT deactivation value
HC11 OT deactivation value–50.0 to+50.0 °C

HC12 OT deactivation value
HC13 OT deactivation value

EB 5578 EN

16-277

Annex A (configuration instructions)

Settings at the rotary switch · Times-of-use · Switch position
Times-of-use HC1

Mon

Tue

Wed

Thu

Fri

Sat

Sun

Value range

Start first time-of-use
Stop first time-of-use
Start second time-of-use

00:00 to 24:00
hStop second time-of-use
Start third time-of-use
Stop third time-of-use
Times-of-use HC2

Mon

Tue

Wed

Thu

Fri

Sat

Sun

Value range

Start first time-of-use
Stop first time-of-use
Start second time-of-use

00:00 to 24:00
hStop second time-of-use
Start third time-of-use
Stop third time-of-use
Times-of-use HC3

Mon

Tue

Wed

Thu

Fri

Sat

Sun

Value range

Start first time-of-use
Stop first time-of-use
Start second time-of-use

00:00 to 24:00
hStop second time-of-use
Start third time-of-use
Stop third time-of-use
Times-of-use HC11

Mon

Tue

Wed

Thu

Fri

Sat

Sun

Value range

Start first time-of-use
Stop first time-of-use
Start second time-of-use

00:00 to 24:00
hStop second time-of-use
Start third time-of-use
Stop third time-of-use
Times-of-use HC12

Mon

Tue

Wed

Thu

Fri

Sat

Sun

Value range

Start first time-of-use
Stop first time-of-use
Start second time-of-use
Stop second time-of-use

00:00 to 24:00
hStart third time-of-use
Stop third time-of-use

16-278EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)Times-of-use HC13

Mon

Tue

Wed

Thu

Fri

Sat

Sun

Value range

Start first time-of-use
Stop first time-of-use
Start second time-of-use

00:00 to 24:00
hStop second time-of-use
Start third time-of-use
Stop third time-of-use
Times-of-use DHW

Mon

Tue

Wed

Thu

Fri

Sat

Sun

Value range

Start first time-of-use
Stop first time-of-use
Start second time-of-use

00:00 to 24:00
hStop second time-of-use
Start third time-of-use
Stop third time-of-use
Times-of-use ZP

Mon

Tue

Wed

Thu

Fri

Sat

Sun

Value range

Start first time-of-use
Stop first time-of-use
Start second time-of-use
Stop second time-of-use

00:00 to 24:00
hStart third time-of-use
Stop third time-of-use

EB 5578 EN

16-279Annex A (configuration instructions)

PA1 parameters (heating circuit HC1), PA2 parameters (heating circuit HC2) and PA3parameters (heating circuit HC3)
P

Parameters

PA1
(HC1)

PA2
(HC2)

PA3
(HC3)

Value range

01 Flow gradient

0.2 to 3.2

02 Level (parallel shift)–30.0 to +30.0 °C

03 Flow set point (day)–5.0 to +150.0 °C

04 Flow set point (night)–5.0 to +150.0 °C

05 Four-point characteristic
Outdoor temperature, point 1–50.0 to +50.0 °C

Outdoor temperature, point 2–50.0 to +50.0 °C

Outdoor temperature, point 3–50.0 to +50.0 °C

Outdoor temperature, point 4–50.0 to +50.0 °C

05 Flow temperature, point 1–5.0 to +150.0 °C

Flow temperature, point 2–5.0 to +150.0 °C

Flow temperature, point 3–5.0 to +150.0 °C

Flow temperature, point 4–5.0 to +150.0 °C

Reduced flow temperature, point 1–5.0 to +150.0 °C

Reduced flow temperature, point 2–5.0 to +150.0 °C

Reduced flow temperature, point 3–5.0 to +150.0 °C

Reduced flow temperature, point 4–5.0 to +150.0 °C

Return flow temperature, point 1

5.0 to 90.0 °C

Return flow temperature, point 2

5.0 to 90.0 °C

Return flow temperature, point 3

5.0 to 90.0 °C

Return flow temperature, point 4
Flow rate, point 1

5.0 to 90.0 °C––

0.01 to 650 m³/h

Flow rate, point 2––

0.01 to 650 m³/h

Flow rate, point 3––

0.01 to 650 m³/h
0.01 to 650 m³/h

Flow rate, point 4––

Capacity, point 1––

Capacity, point 2––

Capacity, point 3––

Capacity, point 4––

0.1 to 6500 kWor
1 to 800 pulses/h

06 Min. flow temperature–5.0 to +150.0 °C

07 Max. flow temperature–5.0 to +150.0 °C

09 Outdoor temperature for continuous
day mode–50.0 to +5.0 °C

16-280EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)P

Parameters

PA1
(HC1)

PA2
(HC2)

PA3
(HC3)

Value range

10 Minimum flow temperature set point
HC for binary demand processing

5.0 to 150.0 °C

11 Return flow gradient

0.2 to 3.2

12 Return flow level–30.0 to +30.0 °C

13 Base point for return flow temperature:

5.0 to 90.0 °C

14 Max. return flow temperature

5.0 to 90.0 °C

15 Set point boost (pre-control circuit)

0.0 to 50.0 °C

16 Minimum set point to charge buffer
tank

–

–

OT to 90.0 °C

17 Stop charging of the buffer tank––

OT to 90.0 °C

18 Charging temperature boost––

0.0 to 50.0 °C

19 Lag time of charging pump––

0.0 to 10.0

EB 5578 EN

16-281

Annex A (configuration instructions)

PA11 parameters (heating circuit HC11), PA12 parameters (heating circuit HC12) andPA13 parameters (heating circuit HC13)
PParameters

PA11(HC11)

PA12(HC12)

PA13(HC13)

Value range

01 Flow gradient

0.2 to 3.2

02 Level (parallel shift)–30.0 to 30.0 °C

03 Flow set point (day)–5.0 to 150.0 °C

04 Flow set point (night)–5.0 to 150.0 °C

05 Four-point characteristic
Outdoor temperature, point 1–50.0 to 50.0 °C

Outdoor temperature, point 2–50.0 to 50.0 °C

Outdoor temperature, point 3–50.0 to 50.0 °C

Outdoor temperature, point 4–50.0 to 50.0 °C

Flow temperature, point 1–5.0 to 150.0 °C

Flow temperature, point 2–5.0 to 150.0 °C

Flow temperature, point 3–5.0 to 150.0 °C

Flow temperature, point 4–5.0 to 150.0 °C

Reduced flow temperature, point 1–5.0 to 150.0 °C

Reduced flow temperature, point 2–5.0 to 150.0 °C

Reduced flow temperature, point 3–5.0 to 150.0 °C

Reduced flow temperature, point 4–5.0 to 150.0 °C

Return flow temperature, point 1

5.0 to 90.0 °C

Return flow temperature, point 2

5.0 to 90.0 °C

Return flow temperature, point 3

5.0 to 90.0 °C

Return flow temperature, point 4

5.0 to 90.0 °C

06 Min. flow temperature–5.0 to 150.0 °C

07 Max. flow temperature–5.0 to 150.0 °C

09 Outdoor temperature for continuous
day mode–50.0 to 5.0 °C

11 Return flow gradient

0.2 to 3.2

12 Return flow level–30.0 to 30.0 °C

13 Base point for return flow temperature:

5.0 to 90.0 °C

14 Max. return flow temperature

5.0 to 90.0 °C

16-282EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

CO1 function block parameters (heating circuit HC1), CO2 function block parameters(heating circuit HC2) and CO3 function block parameters (heating circuit HC3)F

Function block parameters

CO1
(HC1)

CO2
(HC2)

CO3
(HC3)

Value range

03 KP (limiting factor)

0.1 to 10.0

05 Start temperature

20.0 to 60.0 °C

Hold (days)

0 to 10 days

Temp. rise/day

0.0 to 10.0 °C

Maximum temperature

25.0 to 60.0 °C

Hold (days)

0 to 10 days

Temp. reduction/day

0.0 to 10.0 °C

Start condition

Stop, Start, Hold, Reduction

09 Cycle time

0 to 100 min

KP (gain)

0.0 to 25.0

12 KP (gain)

0.1 to 50.0

Tn (reset time)

1 to 999 s

TV (derivative-action time)

0 to 999 s

TY (valve transit time)

15 to 240 sHysteresis

1.0 to 30.0 °C

Min. ON time

0 to 10 min

Min. OFF time

0 to 10 min

13 Max. system deviation

3.0 to 10.0 °C

14 Active when BI =17 Active when BI =ON, OFF––ON, OFF

18 Lower transmission range––

0.0 to 150.0 °C

Upper transmission range––

0.0 to 150.0 °C

Boost

–

–

0.0 to 30.0 °C

21 Start speed reduction, limit––

5.0 to 90.0 °C

Stop speed reduction, limit––

5.0 to 90.0 °C

Minimum speed––

0 to 50 %0 to 50 %––0.0 to 50.0 °C

KP (influence factor)––

0.1 to 10.0

Minimum speed––

0 to 100 %25 Temperature limit––

0.0 to 50.0 °C

26 Sensor––

AF1 to SF3 (RüF2)

23 Set point of differential temperature
controlEB 5578 EN

16-283

Annex A (configuration instructions)

F

Function block parameters

CO1
(HC1)

CO2
(HC2)

CO3
(HC3)

28 Variable night set-back, OTL
night 100 %Value range–50.0 to +20.0 °C

Variable night set-back, OTL day 0 %–50.0 to +5.0 °C

CO11 function block parameters (heating circuit HC11), CO12 function block parameters(heating circuit HC12) and CO13 function block parameters (heating circuit HC13)F

Function block parameters

CO11(HC11)

CO12(HC12)

CO13(HC13)

Value range

03 KP (limiting factor)

0.1 to 10.0

05 Boost

0.0 to 50.0 °C

Start temperature

20.0 to 60.0 °C

Hold (days)

0 to 10 days

Temp. rise/day

0.0 to 10.0 °C

Maximum temperature

25.0 to 60.0 °C

Hold (days)

0 to 30 days

Temp. reduction/day

0.0 to 10.0 °C

Start condition

Stop, Start, Hold, Reduction

09 Cycle time

0 to 100 min

KP (gain)

0.0 to 25.0

12 KP (gain)

0.1 to 50.0

Tn (reset time)

1 to 999 s

TV (derivative-action time)

0 to 999 s

TY (valve transit time)

15 to 240 sHysteresis

1.0 to 30.0 °C

Min. ON time

0 to 10 min

Min. OFF time

0 to 10 min

13 Max. system deviation

3.0 to 10.0 °C

28 Variable night set-back, OTL
night 100 %–50.0 to +20.0 °C

Variable night set-back, OTL day 0 %16-284–50.0 to +5.0 °C

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

PA4 parameters (domestic hot water heating)P

Parameters

PA4 (DHW)

Value range

01 Min. adjustable DHW set point

5.0 to 90.0 °C

02 Max. adjustable DHW set point

5.0 to 90.0 °C

03 Hysteresis

1.0 to 30.0 °C

04 Charging temperature boost

0.0 to 50.0 °C

05 Max. charging temperature

20.0 to 150.0 °C

06 Lag time for storage tank charging
pump

0.0 to 10.0 x valve transit time

07 Max. return flow temperature

5.0 to 90.0 °C

10 Solar circuit pump ON

1.0 to 30.0 °C

11 Solar circuit pump OFF

0.0 to 90.0 °C

12 Max. storage tank temperature

20.0 to 90.0 °C

19 Lag time for storage tank charging
pump

0.0 to 10

CO4 function block parameters (domestic hot water heating)
F

Function block parameters

03 KP (limiting factor)
04 Select
06 Cancel
Temperature limit
08 Start

CO4 (DHW)

Value range
0.1 to 10.0
Analog, binary
0 to 10 min
20.0 to 90.0 °C
0 to 10 min

KP (influence factor)

0.1 to 10.0

Control circuit

HC1, HC2, HC3, HC1+HC2, HC1+HC3

09 Start
Control circuit

0 to 10 min
HC1, HC2, HC3, HC1+HC2, HC1+HC3

12 Minimum speed

5 to 50 %KP (gain)

0.1 to 50.0

Tn (reset time)

1 to 999 s

TV (derivative-action time)

0 to 999 s

TY (valve transit time)

15 to 240 sHysteresis

1.0 to 30.0 °C

Min. ON time

0 to 10 min

Min. OFF time

0 to 10 min

13 Max. system deviation

3.0 to 10.0 °C

EB 5578 EN

16-285

Annex A (configuration instructions)

F

Function block parameters

CO4 (DHW)

14 Day of the week

Value range
Monday to Sunday, daily

Time

Adjustable as required

Disinfection temperature

60.0 to 90.0 °C

Set point boost

0.0 to 50.0 °C

Duration

0 to 255 min

Active when BI =ON, OFF

21 Start speed reduction

5.0 to 90.0 °C

Stop speed reduction

5.0 to 90.0 °C

Minimum speed

0 to 50 %0 to 50 %22 Valve position when cold charging
protection is active

1 to 100 %25 Return flow set point

5.0 to 90.0 °C

KP (gain)

0.1 to 50.0

Tn (reset time)

30 to 2000 s

Minimum speed

5 to 50 %26 Sensor

AF1 to SF3 (RüF2)

PA5 parameters (system-wide parameters)
P

Parameters

PA5

Value range

01 Start temperature for boiler pump

20.0 to 90.0 °C

02 Boiler pump hysteresis

0.0 to 30.0 °C

CO5 function block parameters (system-wide functions)
F

Function block parameters

04 DateNo. days until activation

CO5

Value range
Adjustable as required
1 to 3

No. days until deactivation

1 to 3Limit

0.0 to 30.0 °C

05 Delay/h

1.0 to 6.0 °C

06 Delay/h

1.0 to 6.0 °C

07 Relay contact
09 Limit

16-286

NC contact, NO contact–15.0 to +3.0 °C

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

F

Function block parameters

10 Max. limit

CO5

Value range
OT to 800 pulses/hMax. limit (heating)

OT to 800 pulses/hMax. limit (DHW)

1 to 800 pulses/hLimiting factor

0.1 to 10.0

12 Switching mode

Binary, analog

Active when BI =13 Maximum buffer tank temperature

ON, OFF20.0 to 90.0 °C

15 Active when BI =21 Return flow temperature limit, layering
at top
23 Direction

ON, OFF
5.0 to 90.0 °C
Input, Output

Lower transmission range–50.0 to +100.0 °C

Upper transmission range–50.0 to +100.0 °C

25 Zero point

0 to 50 %0 to 50 %26 Zero point

0 to 50 %0 to 50 %31 Zero point

5 to 20 %Lower transmission range

0 to 150 °C

Upper transmission range

0 to 150 °C

Output AA1

Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4,
10 V supply, 3 V supply,
differential temperature control,
SLP speed, ZP speed, external
demand, outdoor temperature(Y1)

Output AA2

Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4,
10 V supply, 3 V supply,
differential temperature control,
SLP speed, ZP speed, external
demand, outdoor temperature
(Y2)

34

35

EB 5578 EN

16-287

Annex A (configuration instructions)

PA6 parameters (Modbus)
P

Parameters

PA601 Modbus station address (8 bit)

Value range
1 to 246

CO6 function block parameters (Modbus)
F

Function block parameters

10 Heat meter 1 address

CO6

Value range
0 to 255

HM 1 model

1434, CAL3, APAtO, SLS

Heat meter 1 mode

24 h, Continuous, CoiLHeat meter 2 address

0 to 255

HM 2 model

1434, CAL3, APAtO, SLS

Heat meter 3 mode

24 h, Continuous, CoiLHeat meter 3 address

0 to 255

HM 3 model

1434, CAL3, APAtO, SLS

Heat meter 3 mode

24 h, Continuous, CoiL

11 Max. limit

OT to 650 m³/h

Max. limit (heating)

OT to 650 m³/h

Max. limit (DHW)

0.01 to 650 m³/h

Limiting factor
12 Max. limit

0.1 to 10
OT to 6500 kW

Max. limit (heating)

OT to 6500 kW

Max. limit (DHW)

0.1 to 6500 kW

Limiting factor
13 Max. limit
Limiting factor
14 Max. limit
Limiting factor
15 Max. limit
Limiting factor
16 Max. limit
Limiting factor

16-2880.1 to 10
0.01 to 650 m³/h
0.1 to 10
0.1 to 6500 kW
0.1 to 10
0.01 to 650 m³/h
0.1 to 10
0.1 to 6500 kW
0.1 to 10

EB 5578 EN

Annex A (configuration instructions)

CO7 function block parameters (device bus)
F

Function block parameters1

Device bus address

CO7

Value range
Auto, 1 to 32

3

Device bus address

Auto, 1 to 32

4

Device bus address

Auto, 1 to 32

5

Device bus address

Auto, 1 to 32

6

Register number

1 to 4

7

Register number

1 to 4

8

Register number

1 to 4

9

Register number

1 to 4

10 Register number

5 to 65

11 Register number

5 to 65

12 Register number

5 to 65

13 Register number

5 to 65

15 Register number

5 to 65

17 Register number

5 to 65

18 Register number

5 to 65

19 Register number

5 to 65

20 Register number

5 to 65

21 Register number

5 to 65

22 Register number

5 to 65

23 Register number

5 to 65

CO8 function block parameters (initialization of BI1 and BI2)F

Function block parameters

1

Error message when

BI = 0, BI = 1, none (1)2Error message when

BI = 0, BI = 1, none (1)3Error message when

BI = 0, BI = 1, none (1)4Error message when

BI = 0, BI = 1, none (1)5Error message when

BI = 0, BI = 1, none (1)6Error message when

BI = 0, BI = 1, none (1)9Error message when

BI = 0, BI = 1, none (1)10 Error message when

BI = 0, BI = 1, none (1)11 Error message when

BI = 0, BI = 1, none (1)12 Error message when

BI = 0, BI = 1, none (1)13 Error message when

BI = 0, BI = 1, none (1)EB 5578 EN

CO8Value range

16-289Annex A (configuration instructions)

F

Function block parameters

CO8

Value range

15 Error message when

BI = 0, BI = 1, none (1)16 Error message when

BI = 0, BI = 1, none (1)17 Error message when

BI = 0, BI = 1, none (1)16-290EB 5578 EN

Annex B

17 Annex B
17.1 Accessories
TROVIS I/O (expansion module)

Order no. 1000062999

Memory module

Order no. 1400-9379

Mini module

Order no. 1400-7436

Data logging module

Order no. 1400-9378

USB converter 3

Order no. 1400-9377

TROVIS-VIEW software (free of charge)

u www.samsongroup.com > SERVICE & SUPPORT >Downloads > TROVIS-VIEW

RS-485 communication module

Order no. 8812-2002

Surge arrester SA 5000

Order no. 1400-9868

SAM HOME Gateway

Type 5660

SAM MOBILE Gateway

Type 5655

SAM LAN Gateway

Type 5650

Water flow sensor with extension cable

Order no. 1400-9246

EB 5578 EN

17-1

Annex B

17.2 After-sales service
After-sales service
Contact our after-sales service for support
concerning service or repair work or whenmalfunctions or defects arise.
You can reach our after-sales service ataftersalesservice@samsongroup.com .
Addresses of SAMSON AG and its subsidiaries
The addresses of SAMSON AG, its subsidiaries, representatives and service facilities
worldwide can be found on our website(www.samsongroup.com) or in all SAMSON
product catalogs.
Required specifications
Please submit the following details:− Model number− Firmware version− Serial number

17-2

EB 5578 EN

Key number

1732

SAMSON AKTIENGESELLSCHAFT
Weismüllerstraße 3 · 60314 Frankfurt am Main, Germany
Phone: +49 69 4009-0 · Fax: +49 69 4009-1507
samson@samsongroup.com · www.samsongroup.com

2023-08-02 · English

EB 5578 EN